MINI Hardtop (2016) - Car

Hardtop (2016) - Car MINI - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Hardtop (2016) MINI in PDF.

📄 251 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice MINI Hardtop (2016) - page 3
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Car
Brand MINI
Model Hardtop (2016)
Category Subcompact hatchback
Engine Options 1.5L 3-cylinder turbo (134 hp) or 2.0L 4-cylinder turbo (189 hp)
Transmission 6-speed manual or 6-speed automatic (Steptronic)
Drivetrain Front-wheel drive
Seating Capacity 4 (3-door) or 5 (5-door)
Fuel Type Premium unleaded (recommended 91 octane)
Fuel Tank Capacity 11.6 US gallons
Dimensions (L x W x H) 151.1 x 68.0 x 55.7 inches
Wheelbase 98.2 inches
Curb Weight Approx. 2,700 lbs
Safety Systems Airbags (front, side, knee, head), DSC, ABS, Brake Assist, Tire Pressure Monitor
Audio System AM/FM radio, USB/Aux input, optional HD Radio and satellite
Climate Control Manual or automatic air conditioning with microfilter
Power Windows Front and rear (5-door) with pinch protection
Central Locking Remote keyless entry with Comfort Access optional
Sunroof Panoramic glass sunroof with tilt/slide function
Maintenance Interval Condition Based Service (CBS); oil change approx. 10,000 miles or 1 year
Tire Pressure (recommended) Front: 32 psi, Rear: 38 psi (check label on driver's door)
Owner's Manual Pages 251

Frequently Asked Questions - Hardtop (2016) MINI

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?
On the radio, press MENU, select "Telephone", then "Bluetooth" and follow prompts. Ensure your phone is discoverable. The vehicle name will appear. Confirm pairing code.
How do I reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)?
After inflating tires to correct pressure, restart the vehicle. In the radio, go to "Vehicle settings", "Tire Pressure Monitor", and select "Reset". Drive for a few minutes to initialize.
How do I use the automatic climate control?
Press the AUTO button and set the desired temperature. The system automatically controls fan speed, air distribution, and recirculation. You can adjust intensity with the AUTO intensity setting.
How do I replace a headlight bulb?
Access from under the hood. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. Replace with same type (e.g., H7 halogen). Do not touch the glass. Reinstall socket and test.
How do I jump-start the vehicle?
Use jump-start terminals under the hood. Connect positive cable to positive terminal, then to donor battery positive. Connect negative cable to donor negative, then to a ground point on your vehicle (not the battery). Start donor vehicle, then start your MINI.
What type of engine oil should I use?
MINI recommends BMW Longlife-12 FE 0W-30 or 5W-30 synthetic oil. Check oil filler cap for exact specification. Use only approved oils.
How do I set the clock on the radio?
Press MENU, select "Settings", then "Time/Date". Adjust hour and minute using the knob. Press to confirm.
How do I activate cruise control?
Press the cruise control button on the steering wheel. While driving, press SET to store current speed. Adjust speed with RES/SET. Cancel by pressing CANCEL or braking.
How do I open the fuel filler flap?
Press the button on the driver's door or unlock the vehicle. The flap is on the right side. Push the flap to open. If locked, use the emergency release in the trunk.
How do I change the wiper blades?
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield. Press the tab on the wiper blade and slide it off. Attach new blade by sliding into hook until it clicks. Lower arm carefully.

User questions about Hardtop (2016) MINI

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

Your email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone answers your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual Hardtop (2016) - MINI and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Hardtop (2016) by MINI.

USER MANUAL Hardtop (2016) MINI

MINI Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI

The MINI team

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written

consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English VI/15, 07 15 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached

without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

CONTENTS

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 242.

6 Information

AT A GLANCE

14 Cockpit
18 Radio

CONTROLS

22 Opening and closing
36 Adjusting
45 Transporting children safely
49 Driving
62 Displays
76 Lights
81 Safety
97 Driving stability control systems
101 Driving comfort
115 Climate control
121 Interior equipment
123 Digital compass
129 Storage compartments

DRIVING TIPS

136 Things to remember when driving
139 Loading
142 Saving fuel

ENTERTAINMENT

150 Tone
151 Radio
156 Multimedia

COMMUNICATION

164 Bluetooth hands-free system

MOBILITY

174 Refueling
176 Fuel
178 Wheels and tires
193 Engine compartment
195 Engine oil
198 Coolant
200 Maintenance
202 Replacing components
214 Breakdown assistance
220 Care

REFERENCE

226 Technical data
231 Appendix
235 License Texts and Certifications
242 Everything from A to Z

INFORMATION

USING THIS OWNER'S MANUAL

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.

Additional sources of information

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop will be glad to answer additional questions at any time.

Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com

SYMBOLS AND DISPLAYS

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Marks the end of a specific item of information.

"..." Identifies radio display texts used to select individual functions.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented as numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order.

  1. First action step.

  2. Second action step.

Enumerations

Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as list with bullet points.

▶ First possibility.

▶ Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components

i Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also describe and illustrate features that are not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional features or the country-specific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Handbooks.

On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently from what is shown in the illustrations.

STATUS OF THE OWNER'S MANUAL

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.

OWN SAFETY

Manufacturer

The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a dealer's service center.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealer's service center.

If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, e.g. maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, e.g. maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks.

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

California laws require us to state the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

▶ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▶ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▶ California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance measures:

▶ MINI Maintenance system
▶ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models
▶ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

DATA MEMORY

Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that temporarily or permanently store technical information about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment:

▶ Operating mode of system components, fill levels for instance.
▶ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rotation speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration.
▶ Malfunctions and faults in important system components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▶ Responses by the vehicle to special situations such as airbag deployment or engaging the stability control system.
▶ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.

This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to optimize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., repair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical information can be read out from the event and fault memories by employees of the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, including the manufacturer, using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain further information there if you need it. After an error is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis.

With the vehicle in use there are situations where you can associate these technical data with individuals if combined with other information, e.g., an accident report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert.

Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer - such as vehicle emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

▶ How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.

▶ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▶ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment.

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe-rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe-rcar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Interior view of a car with hands holding the steering wheel, dashboard, and digital navigation screen showing map or data (no readable text or symbols)

WATCH ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

COCKPIT

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

ALL AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL
7 6 8 5 9 3 4 11 10 2 1 12

1 Power windows 31
2 Exterior mirror operation 42
3 Central locking system 26
4 Lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 2

Front fog lights 79

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 3

Lights off

Daytime running lights 78

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 4

Parking lights 76

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 5

Low beams 76

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 6

Automatic headlight control 77

Corner-illuminating lights 78

High-beam Assistant 78

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 7

Instrument lighting 79

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 8

Camera-based cruise control on/off 101

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 9

Cruise control on/off 106

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 10

Store speed 101, 106

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 11

Pause, continue cruise control 101, 106

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 12

Set speed 101, 106

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 13

Reduce distance 101

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 14

Increase distance 101

6 Steering column stalk, left

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 15

Turn signal 54

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 16

High beams, head-light flasher 54

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 17

High-beam Assistant 78

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 18

Roadside parking lights 77

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 19

On-board computer 71

7 Instrument cluster 62

8 Steering column stalk, right

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 20

Windshield wipers 55

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 21

Rain sensor 55

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 22

Cleaning windows 56

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 23

Rear window wiper 56

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 24

Cleaning rear window 56

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 25

Telephone 164

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 26

Confirm the selection 70

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 27

Selection back 70

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 28

Selection next 70

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 29

Increase volume

MINI Hardtop (2016) - VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS - 30

Reduce volume

10 Horn

11 Adjust the steering wheel 44

12 Unlock hood 194

ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE

Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.

1 Hazard warning system 214

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 2

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 3

Intelligent Safety 90

2 Radio 151
3 Glove compartment 129
4 Climate control 115
5 PD Park Distance Control 108

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 4

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 5

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 97

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 6

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 7

Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 49

Auto Start/Stop function 51

6 Steptronic transmission selector lever 58
Manual transmission selector lever 58
7 Parking brake 53
8 Driving Dynamics Control 99

ALL AROUND THE ROOFLINER

1 2 SOS PASS AIRBAG OFF 3 6 5 4 3

1 Emergency Request

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE ROOFLINER - 2

2 Indicator lamp, front-seat pass.

airbag 83

3 Reading lights 80

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE ROOFLINER - 3

4 Ambient light 80

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE ROOFLINER - 4

5 Glass sunroof 33

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ALL AROUND THE ROOFLINER - 5

6 Interior lights 80

RADIO

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

OVERVIEW

3 2 1 12 1 2 3 4 5 FM/AM MENU BACK OPTION 6 7 8 RADIO MEDIA TEL 11 10 9 8

1 Change waveband
2 Volume, on/off
3 Display
4 Opening the main menu
5 Menu level back
6 Selecting menu items

▶ Turn: highlight the menu item in the display or adjust the value.

▶ Press: select the highlighted menu item or store the setting.

7 Open the options for the respective menu.
8 "Telephone": open the menu.
9 Programmable memory buttons
10 "Media": open the menu.
11 "Radio": open the menu.
12 Change the station or track.

Functions

Audio functions and vehicle functions can be operated, adjusted and displayed on the radio.

▷ Radio.
Multimedia.
▶ Telephone.
▶ Vehicle settings.
▷ Check Control messages.

All functions of the radio can be called up via the main menu. Some menus can also be called up directly via the buttons on the radio.

Selecting menu items

Menu items can be selected if they are highlighted.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Selecting menu items - 1

  1. MENDutton.

  2. Turn the right-hand knob until the desired menu item is highlighted, e.g., "Radio".

  3. Press the right-hand knob again to confirm the highlighted menu item.

Representation in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Radio".

Symbols in the status field

Audio source

Symbol Meaning

FM, AM Radio waveband.

HD Radio station is being received.

SAT Satellite radio is switched on.

SAT Satellite radio not available.

Playback via Aux In.

Symbol Meaning

Playback via USB audio interface.
Microphone muted
Tone output muted

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Missed call

Wireless network reception strength

Traffic bulletins

Symbol Meaning

TP Traffic bulletins switched on

TP Traffic bulletins switched on, no traffic bulletin stations available.
Traffic Jump

Changing settings

To set number values or values on a scale:

  1. Select the desired menu item.
  2. Turn the right-hand knob to set the value.
  3. Press the right-hand knob to store the value.

Example: setting the clock

  1. MENO button.

  2. "Settings"

  3. "Time/Date"

  4. "Time:"

  5. Turn the right-hand knob until the desired hour is set.

  6. Press the right-hand knob to store setting.
  7. Turn the right-hand knob to set the minutes and press the right-hand knob to save the setting.

OFF START ENGINE STOP OFF

HANDLE ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

OPENING AND CLOSING

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

REMOTE CONTROL/KEY

General information

The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with integrated key.

Every remote control holds a replaceable battery.

You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific version. For Settings, refer to page 29.

The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 24.

The remote controls hold information on required maintenance. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 200

Overview
1 2 3 4

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlock the tailgate
4 Panic mode

Integrated key
1 MINI 2

Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, arrow 2.

The integrated key fits the driver's door lock.

Replacing the battery

  1. Remove integrated key from remote control.
  2. Slide the key into the opening and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3D rendered illustration of a mechanical component with a handle and internal structure, no text or symbols present

  1. Slide the key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical device with a handle and internal components, no text or symbols present

  1. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up.

  2. Insert lid and cover.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Replacing the battery - 3

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

New remote controls

New remote controls are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controls

The lost remote control can be blocked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Emergency detection of remote control

It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following:

▶ Interference of radio transmission to remote control by external sources e.g., by radio masts.
▶ Empty battery in remote control.
▶ Interference from radio transmissions through mobile devices in close proximity to remote control.
▶ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mobile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine via emergency detection of the remote control

Close-up of a car's steering wheel and dashboard with a visible sensor or sensor device (no text or symbols)

Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake.

Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch.

PERSONAL PROFILE

The concept

Personal Profile provides three profiles, using which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote control has one of these profiles assigned.

If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control, the assigned personal profile will be activated. All settings stored in the profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal settings during unlocking. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control.

Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the personal profile.

Adjusting

The settings for the following systems and functions are saved in the active profile. The scope of storable settings is country- and equipment-dependable.

▶ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▶ Climate control.
▶ Park Distance Control PDC.
▶ Driving Dynamics Control.
▶ Cruise control.
▶ Intelligent Safety.

USING THE REMOTE CON- TROL

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. The vehicle can then not be opened from the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the remote control along so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Unlocking

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Unlocking - 1

Press button on the remote control.

The vehicle is unlocked.
The interior lights are switched on, when it is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also switched on. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually.
The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 29.

The alarm system, refer to page 30, is disarmed.

Convenient opening

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Convenient opening - 1

Press and hold this button on the remote control after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed.

Locking

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Locking - 1

WARNING

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

If people must spend a longer time in the vehicle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

The driver's door must be closed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

Press button on the remote control.

The alarm system, refer to page 30, is armed.

If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lock the car, this means that the engine or ignition is still switched on. In this case, the engine or ignition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

Switching on interior lights and courtesy lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on interior lights and courtesy lights - 1

Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

The courtesy lamps are only switched on when it is dark outside. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually.

If the button is pressed within 10 seconds of when the vehicle was locked Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft warning system, refer to page 31, are turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Panic mode - 1

Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Unlocking the tailgate

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Unlocking the tailgate - 1

Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of whether the vehicle was previously locked or unlocked.

To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the features and the country version, it is also possible to have door unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 29.

If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is locked again as soon as it closes.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Unlocking the tailgate - 2

CAUTION

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear window and heat conductors while driving. There is risk of property damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the rear window.

Malfunction

Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the following circumstances:

The battery of the remote control is discharged. Replace the battery, refer to page 22.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power.
▶ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.
▶ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the integrated key, refer to page 26.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

FCC ID:

▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
MYTCAS4.

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and
- this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

WITHOUT REMOTE CONTROL

From the outside

MINI Hardtop (2016) - From the outside - 1

WARNING

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

If people must spend a longer time in the vehicle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or key can be damaged. There is risk of property damage. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Close-up of a black curved object with a white arrow pointing to its end, against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, refer to page 22. The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

To do this, unlock the lid from below with the integrated key, arrow, and remove.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control.

From the inside

Locking and unlocking

Close-up of a car's head panel showing the rotary knob (no text or symbols visible)

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Locking and unlocking - 2

Press button.

Vehicle is locked.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Locking and unlocking - 3

Press button.

The vehicle is unlocked.

Pressing the buttons for the central locking system locks and unlocks the doors and the tailgate when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Unlocking and opening

Either unlock the doors together using the central locking system buttons and then pull the door handle above the armrest or pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.

TAILGATE

Information

To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear window and heat conductors while driving. There is risk of property damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the rear window.

Opening from the outside

When the tailgate is opened, make sure there is sufficient clearance to prevent damage.

Side view of a car's rear bumper with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

▶ Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

As the case may be, the doors are also unlocked. Unlocking with the remote control, refer to page 25.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Opening from the inside

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Opening from the inside - 1

With the vehicle is stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell.

Closing

Top-down view of a transparent plastic container with internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail-gate.

COMFORT ACCESS

The concept

The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control.

All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Comfort Access supports the following functions:

▶ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▶ Convenient closing.
▶ Separate unlocking of the tailgate.
▶ Start the engine.

Information

To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Functional requirements

There are no sources of interference nearby.
To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle near the doors.
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started if the remote control is in the vehicle.

Unlocking
Simple diagram of a hand holding a pen with an arrow pointing to it, set against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: Ⓗ

Locking
Abstract black-and-white graphic with a curved arrow and dot, no text or symbols present

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: 📄

To save battery power, ensure that all power consumers are turned off before locking the vehicle.

Convenient closing

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Convenient closing - 1

WARNING

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Abstract black-and-white graphic with a curved arrow and dot, no text or symbols present

Press and hold down the handle of the driver or the front seat passenger.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: 📄

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.

Unlocking the tailgate separately

Press button on tailgate's exterior.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: 📄

The situation of the doors does not change.

Malfunction

Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the following circumstances:

The battery of the remote control is discharged. Replace the battery, refer to page 22.
▶ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power.
▶ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.
▶ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote

control or using the integrated key, refer to page 26.

ADJUSTING

Unlocking

The settings are saved in the active profile. Personal Profile, refer to page 24.

Doors

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Doors - 1

Press button.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Doors/Key"
  3. Select the symbol.
  4. Select the desired function.

▶ "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

▶ "Driver's door"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-locks the entire vehicle.

Tailgate

Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases.

  1. MENU Press Button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Doors/Key"
  4. Select the symbol.
  5. Select the desired function.

▷ "Tailgate"

Only the tailgate is unlocked.

▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"

The tailgate and the doors are unlocked.

Locking

The settings are saved in the active profile. Personal Profile, refer to page 24.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Locking - 1

Press button.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Doors/Key"

  3. Select desired setting.

▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened.
▶ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Confirmation signals from the vehicle - 1

utton.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Doors/Key"
  3. Select desired setting.

▶ "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

▶ "Acoustic warning"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

ALARM SYSTEM

The concept

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to:

▶ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▶ Movements in the vehicle interior.
Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the car.

▶ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
Acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▶ By flashing the daytime running lights.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Access, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.

Switch off the alarm, refer to page 31.

Tailgate in case of armed alarm system

The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is armed.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Panic mode - 1

Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

3D rendering of a mechanical component with a central hub and an upward arrow, no visible text or symbols

The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

The alarm system is armed.

The indicator lamp flashes after locking:

Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.

After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

When the still open access is closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations:

In automatic car washes.

▷ In duplex garages.

During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer.

▶ With animals in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor - 1

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi-

cle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are turned off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm

▶ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, refer to page 23.

For Comfort Access: If you have the remote control with you, unlock vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

POWER WINDOWS

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:

▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.

▶ Releasing the parking brake.

▶ Opening and closing of doors or windows.

▶ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▶ Using vehicle equipment.

There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

On 5-door models
Close-up of a car air vent and rearview mirror (no text or symbols visible)

On 3-door models
Close-up of a black electronic device control panel with buttons and lens (no visible text or symbols)

Opening

Press the button to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window opens automatically. Pressing again stops the motion.

See also: Convenient opening, refer to page 24, via remote control.

Closing

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Closing - 1

WARNING

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 2

Pull the switch to the resistance point.

The window closes while the switch is held.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 3

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 4

Pull the switch beyond the resistance.

The window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion.

See also: closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to page 28.

Pinch protection system

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Pinch protection system - 1

WARNING

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is risk of injuries. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes, closing is interrupted.

The window reopens slightly.

Closing without the pinch protection system

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Closing without the pinch protection system - 1

WARNING

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure

that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

  1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin.

  1. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

On 5-door models: safety switch

The concept

The opening and closing of the rear window can be blocked via the safety switch for the rear. This makes sense, for example, if children or animals are carried in the rear.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the windows, press the safety switch, e.g. if children or animals are carried in the rear.

Overview

Close-up of a car interior panel with illuminated buttons and a circular vent (no text or symbols visible)

Switching on and off

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on and off - 1

Press button.

The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

PANORAMIC GLASS SUN-ROOF

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed on operating the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:

▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▶ Releasing the parking brake.
▶ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▶ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▶ Using vehicle equipment.

There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Top-down view of a car dashboard with two rotary buttons and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

Tilting the glass sunroof

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Tilting the glass sunroof - 1

Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

MINI Hardtop (2016) - When the glass sunroof is closed - 1

Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops

the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

MINI Hardtop (2016) - With the glass sunroof completely raised - 1

▶ Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

▶ Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position

If the glass sunroof stops before it is completely opened, it is in the Comfort position. In this position the wind noises in the interior are the least.

If desired, continue the movement by Pressing the switch.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open

MINI Hardtop (2016) - With the glass sunroof open - 1

▶ Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

▶ Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch toward the back stops the motion.

▶ Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

MINI Hardtop (2016) - With the glass sunroof completely raised - 1

Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof reopens slightly.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Pinch protection system - 1

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed on operating the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Closing without the pinch protection system

If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

  1. Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold it.
    The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin.
  2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure, it can happen that the glass sunroof can only be raised. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

ADJUSTING

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

SITTING SAFELY

The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with:

▶ Safety belts, refer to page 38.

▶ Head restraints, refer to page 40.

Airbags, refer to page 81.

SEATS

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is risk of an accident. Only adjust the side on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the protective effect of the safety belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.

There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest in an as upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

There is risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Adjusting seats

Overview

Diagram of car seat components with numbered labels pointing to different parts

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Interior view of a car seatbelt seat with a white arrow indicating the seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages properly.

Height

Close-up of a car's seatbelt buckle with white arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Interior view of a car seatbelt with an arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Close-up of a car wheel with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature.

Thigh support

Close-up of a car's engine compartment showing a belt buckle and valve mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

In 3-door models: entering the rear

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

There is risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Unexpected movements of the backrest while driving may occur due to an unlocked backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There is

risk of injuries. Fold back and lock the backrests before driving.

Fold down seat back

  1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Fold backrest forward.
  2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

The driver's seat features a mechanical memory function for forward/back and backrest adjustment.

  1. Push the seat back into the original position.
  2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position, the seat latches in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 37.

Front seat heating

Close-up of a car air conditioning dashboard with three rotary gauges and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)

Switching on

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on - 1

Press button once for each temperature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When Green mode, refer to page 143, is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switch off - 1

Press button longer.

The LEDs go out.

SAFETY BELTS

Seats with safety belt

The vehicle has four or five seating positions, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

General information

Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off.

For the occupants' safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it.

If needed, disengage the belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.

Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on the left and right.

The center rear safety belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

If the safety belt is used by more than one person, the protective effect of the safety belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed in an occupant's lap, but must be transported and respectively secured in designated child restraint systems.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

The protective effect of the safety belts can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

With a rear backrest that is not locked, the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.

Correct use of safety belts

▶ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to your body as possible over your lap and shoulders.
▶ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your lap. The belt may not press on your stomach.
Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
▶ Avoid thick clothing.
▶ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward around your upper body.

Buckling the belt

General information

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a white arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt

  1. Hold the belt firmly.
  2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
  3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat - 1

The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Damage to safety belts

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Damage to safety belts - 1

WARNING

The protective effect of the safety belts may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

▶ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or changed in any other way.
▶ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily soiled.
▶ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head restraints on occupied seats prior to driving and make sure that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is risk of injuries.

Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▶ Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows, while driving.

Correctly adjusted head restraint

General information

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjust the headrest via the backrest tilt as needed.

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.

Adjusting the height

Interior view of a car showing a white seat with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

To raise: pull.
To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push headrest down.

Removing

Interior view of a car showing a seat with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols present)

  1. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
  2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

To remove the headrest, fold the backrest rearward if it is in the upright position.

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head restraints on occupied seats prior to driving and make sure that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is risk of injuries.

Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▶ Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows, while driving.

Correctly adjusted head restraint

General information

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Adjusting the height

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle head and seat with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

To raise: push.
To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push headrest down.

Folding down

Interior view of a car showing a white helmet with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▶ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.

Removing

Fold the seat down, refer to page 127, before removing the head restraint, otherwise the head restraint cannot be removed.

Close-up of a car's head and side view showing a circular component with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull head restraint up against the resistance.
  2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

MIRRORS

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mirror setting is stored for the profile currently used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if this function is active.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g. while changing lanes. There is risk of an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 2 3

1 Adjusting 42
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out 43

Selecting a mirror

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Selecting a mirror - 1

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Adjusting electrically - 1

The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manually

In case of electrical malfunction press edges of mirror.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

Activating

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating - 1

  1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.

  2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position.

Fold in and out

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Fold in and out - 1

CAUTION

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in car washes. There is risk of property damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

Press button.

Possible at speeds up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Beneficial in the following situations:

In car washes.
On narrow roads.
For folding mirrors back out that were folded away manually.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed. Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror, refer to page 43.

Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever
Diagram of a funnel-shaped object with two upward arrows inside, against a black background (no text or symbols)

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear view mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob
Diagram of a bowl with a central object and directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature

The concept
Two black medical device views showing internal components with white arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror glass.
On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement

For proper operation:

▷ Keep the photocells clean.
Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield.

STEERING WHEEL

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Adjusting

Interior view of a car dashboard with a white arrow pointing to the left side of the keyhole (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Switch on the ignition.
  2. Fold the lever down.
  3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
  4. Fold the lever back.
  5. Switch off the ignition again if needed.

TRANSPORTING CHILDREN SAFELY

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

THE RIGHT PLACE FOR CHILDREN

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:

▶ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▶ Releasing the parking brake.
▶ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▶ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▶ Using vehicle equipment.

There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Children should always be in the rear

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Children should always be in the rear - 1

WARNING

Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable additional restraint systems. The protective effect of the safety belts can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable restraint systems.

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child.

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat

Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 83.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

INSTALLING CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEMS

Information

Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system in the rear:

Move the front passenger's seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 83.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Deactivating airbags - 1

WARNING

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security
Interior view of a car showing a car seat with driver seat and passenger seat (no visible text or symbols)

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

  1. Pull out the strap completely.
  2. Secure the child restraint system with the belt.

  3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

  4. Remove the child restraint system.

  5. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.

Unlocking the safety belt

  1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

Information

Pay attention to the operating and safety information of the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing system.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely engaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Position - 1

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH symbols. It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint sys-

tem on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child restraint systems

Pull the belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems

  1. Install child restraint system, see manufacturer's information.
  2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

The mounting points for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only provided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is risk of property damage. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper retaining straps.

Mounting points

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Mounting points - 1

The respective symbol shows the anchor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked

with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Retaining strap guide

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Retaining strap guide - 1

WARNING

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect can be reduced. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not guided across sharp edges and without twisting to the upper retaining strap.

1 2 6 3 5 4

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point

  1. Raise the head restraint if needed.
  2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint.
  3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the back seat.
  4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point - 1

WARNING

In case of an accident, people sitting in the back can come into contact with the tightened retaining strap of the child restraint system on the front passenger seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. With a mounted child restraint system, do not carry any people on the rear seat behind the front passenger seat.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In particular situations, e.g. braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.

ON 5-DOOR MODELS: LOCKING THE DOORS AND WINDOWS

Doors
Close-up of a car wheel rim with white directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Safety switch for the rear - 1

Press button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 33.

DRIVING

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

START/STOP BUTTON

The concept

MINI Hardtop (2016) - The concept - 1

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever posi-

tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the clutch pedal.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off:

During locking, also with the low beams activated.
▶ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are turned off.
When opening and closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are turned off.
▶ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 15 minutes of no use.

Radio ready state

Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation.

The radio-ready state is switched off automatically in the following situations:

▶ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.
▶ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

▶ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▶ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.

If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, the daytime running lights are activated.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - DANGER - 1

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away. There is risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, observe the following:

▷ Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

In the case of repeated starting attempts or repeated starting in quick succession, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. The catalytic converter can overheat. There is risk of property damage. Avoid repeated starting in quick succession.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

  1. Depress the brake pedal.
  2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
  3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

  1. Depress the brake pedal.
  2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
  3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

ENGINE STOP

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:

▶ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▶ Releasing the parking brake.
▶ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▶ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▶ Using vehicle equipment.

There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away. There is risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, observe the following:

▷ Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.

Before driving into a car wash

So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash observe instructions for going into an automatic car wash, refer to page 220.

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine

  1. Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped.
  2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on.
  3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

  1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

  1. Shift into first gear or reverse.
  2. Set the parking brake.

AUTO START/STOP FUNCTION

The concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off.

Automatic operation

After every start of the engine using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in the last selected state, refer to page 53. When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is available when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stop

The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions:

Manual transmission:

▶ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.
The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
▶ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped.

The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake pedal, engage lever in position P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displays in the instrument cluster - 1

The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displays in the instrument cluster - 2

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

▶ External temperature too low.
The external temperature is high and automatic climate control is running.
The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.

The engine is not yet at operating temperature.

The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.

▶ After driving in reverse.

Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.

The vehicle battery charge is very low.

▶ At higher elevations.

The engine compartment lid is unlocked.

The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▶ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the following conditions:

▶ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.

▶ Steptronic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met:

The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time.

The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Functional limitations

Even if driving off was not intended, the deactivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

Excessive warming of the car's interior when the cooling function is switched on.

The steering wheel is turned.

▶ Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

▶ Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.

The vehicle begins rolling.

Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.

The vehicle battery charge is very low.
Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on.
▶ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Close-up of a car dashboard with multiple switches and buttons (no readable text or symbols)

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Using the button - 2

Press button.

▶ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

▶ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e. g., when leaving it.

  1. Steptronic transmission: engage selector lever position P.

  2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

  3. Manual transmission: shift into first gear or reverse.

  4. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons as if the driver were absent.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

PARKING BRAKE

Applying

The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Applying - 1

The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Applying - 2

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

If for once use during driving is required, engage the parking brake slightly and hold the button down.

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake action, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.

The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set.

Releasing

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a shaft inserted into a car gear (no text or symbols visible)

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

TURN SIGNAL, HIGH BEAMS, HEADLIGHT FLASHER

Turn signal

Turn signal in exterior mirror

When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on the exterior mirror are easy to see.

Using turn signals

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols visible)

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

The turn signal lever returns into is starting position after actuation.

To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation

Slightly tap lever.

The turn signal flashes three times.

The function can be activated or deactivated.

Set via radio.

Press button.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Lighting"

  3. "Triple turn signal"

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▶ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

WASHER/WIPER SYSTEM

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor overheat on switching on. There is risk of property damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

WARNING

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, damage may occur to parts of the vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

Switching on

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

▶ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

▶ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point. Wipers change to normal speed when vehicle comes to standstill.

Switch off and brief wipe

Interior view of a car dashboard with a rotary knob and directional arrow (no text or symbols visible)

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

▷ Single wipe: press down once.

To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.

To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.

Interval mode or rain sensor

The concept

Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the windshield, directly behind the interior rearview mirror.

Activating/deactivating

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and rotary dial (no visible text or symbols)

Press button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.

When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating/deactivating - 2

CAUTION

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in car washes. There is risk of property damage. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Washing the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the wiper lever towards you.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind-shield and activates the wipers briefly.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Washing the windshield - 2

WARNING

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

When the wiper water container is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is risk of property damage. Do not use the washer system when the wash water container is empty.

Rear window wiper

Switching on the rear window wiper

Interior view of a car dashboard with three circular arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward, arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en-

gaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Cleaning rear window

In interval mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.

Fold-out position of the wipers

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, e.g.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Fold-out position of the wipers - 1

WARNING

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, damage may occur to parts of the vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

  1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
  2. With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield.
  3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

  1. Switch on the ignition.
  2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

WASHER FLUID

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Improperly executed work under the hood can damage components and lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Have work under the hood be executed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Washer fluid reservoir

Black and white photo of a vehicle's front view with a circular warning sign (no readable text or symbols)

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir in the engine compartment.

Fill with a mixture of windshield washer concentrate and tap water and – if required – with

a washer antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the right mixture.

Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system.

Do not mix window washer concentrates of different manufacturers because they can clog the windshield washer nozzles.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Shifting - 1

CAUTION

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive speeds can damage the engine. There is risk of property damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the selector lever dynamically to the left and engage the reverse gear.

STEPTRONIC TRANSMISSION

Selector lever positions

D Drive

Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

R is Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral:

The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car washes, e.g.

P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging selector lever positions

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.

With the vehicle is stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise, the selector lever is blocked: shift lock.

A block prevents the inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R or the inadvertent change from selector lever position P.

Canceling the lock

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism with no visible text or symbols

Press button on the front of the selector lever, arrow.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the sport program

Mechanical gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., S1.

The sport program of the transmission is activated.

Activating the M/S manual mode

  1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D.
  2. Push the selector lever forward or backward.

Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., M1.

If the situation requires, the Steptronic transmission continues to shift automatically.

Example: once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

Switching to manual mode

To shift down: press the selector lever forward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the currently selected gear.

Manual mode M/S: prevent automatic upshifting

Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if one of the following conditions is met:

▷ DSC is deactivated.
▶ TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshift for kickdown.

With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously operating the kickdown and the left shift paddle. However, this effect is not produced via the shift paddles when switching briefly from D to manual mode.

Ending the sport program/manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Interior view of a car dashboard with the Mini wheel and directional arrows indicating steering control (no text or symbols beyond branding)

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

▶ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▶ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▶ With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode.

If the selector lever is still in selector lever position D with the respective transmission version, it is possible to switch back into the automatic mode:

▶ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
or

In addition to the briefly pulled right shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.

In the manual mode, after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

Displays in the instrument cluster

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displays in the instrument cluster - 1

The selector lever position is displayed, e.g.: P.

Manually release the transmission lock

Should the selector lever be blocked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being turned on, the brake being depressed and the unlock button being pressed, the transmission lock can be manually canceled:

Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, engage the parking brake forcefully to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

  1. Loosen the sleeve of the selector lever.
  2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever. Unplug the cable connector if needed.
  3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 202, press the yellow release lever downward, arrow.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a circular feature (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Move the selector lever slightly toward the rear; to do this press the unlock button on the front of the selector lever.
    Release the release lever.

  2. Bring the selector lever into the desired position.

Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control

The concept

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 136, period.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode, refer to page 97.

Requirements

Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km.

To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

  1. Button and select SPORT with Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 99. The instrument cluster displays TRACTION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

  2. Engage selector lever position S.

  3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.
  4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.

  1. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the transmission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.

DISPLAYS

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Overview, instrument cluster
1 2 3 2 4 READY OFF 6 5

1 Tachometer 67
2 Messages, e.g. Check Control
3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 67
5 Display/reset miles 67
6 Electronic displays 63

Electronic displays

1 2 3

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, e.g. Check Control

Time 67

External temperature 67

Selection lists 70

Total miles/trip odometer 67

On-board computer 71

2 Selector lever position display 58

Gear shift indicator 68

3 Driving Dynamics Control 99

Status

CHECK CONTROL

The concept

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the radio.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Safety belt reminder - 1

Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also

be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

Airbag system

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Airbag system - 1

Airbag system and belt tensioner are not working.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake, brake system

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Parking brake, brake system - 1

The parking brake is set.

For additional information, refer to Release parking brake, refer to page 54.

BRAKE

Front-end collision warning

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Front-end collision warning - 1

Illuminated: advance warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the

vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase distance.

Flashing: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed.

Intervention by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Pedestrian warning

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Pedestrian warning - 1

If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise Control

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Active Cruise Control - 1

The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.

For more information, see Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 101.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control - 1

Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead detected.

Flashing: the conditions are not adequate for operating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABS

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Anti-lock Braking System ABS - 1

Avoid sudden braking as much as possible. Braking force boost may not be working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac-

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Anti-lock Braking System ABS - 2

count the longer brake distance. Have checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

MINI Hardtop (2016) - DSC Dynamic Stability Control - 1

Flashing: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized.

Reduce speed and the driving circumstances.

Illuminated: DSC failed. Have system checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC, refer to page 97.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

MINI Hardtop (2016) - DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated - 1

Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched off or Dynamic Traction Control DTC is switched on.

For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC, refer to page 97, and Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 98.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Flat Tire Monitor FTM - 1

The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

For additional information, refer to Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 88.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Tire Pressure Monitor TPM - 1

Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected.

▶ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: After leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform the reset of the system again.
A wheel without TPM electronics is mounted: Have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
Malfunction: Have system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 84.

Steering system

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Steering system - 1

Steering system in some cases not working.

Have steering system checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine functions

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Engine functions - 1

Have vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

For additional information, refer to On-board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 201.

Green lights

Turn signal

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Turn signal - 1

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb ed.

For additional information, refer to Turn signal, refer to page 54.

Parking lights, headlight control

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Parking lights, headlight control - 1

Parking lights or headlights are activated.

For additional information, refer to

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 76.

Front fog lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Front fog lights - 1

Front fog lights are activated.

For additional information, refer to Front fog lights, refer to page 79.

High-beam Assistant

MINI Hardtop (2016) - High-beam Assistant - 1

High-beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are activated and off automatically as a function of the traffic sit-

For additional information, refer to High-beam Assistant, refer to page 78.

Cruise control

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Cruise control - 1

The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

MINI Hardtop (2016) - High beams - 1

High beams are activated. For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page 54.

General lamps

MINI Hardtop (2016) - General lamps - 1

At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored.

Text messages

Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights.

Supplementary text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the radio display.

To view the entire text line for line: turn the right-hand knob on the radio.

Hiding Check Control messages

Close-up of a car's internal gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the component (no text or symbols visible)

Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

These messages can be faded for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.

▶ Other Check Control messages are faded automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

  1. MENU button.

  2. "Vehicle Info"

  3. "Vehicle status"

  4. "Check Control"

  5. Selecting the desired Check Control message

Messages after trip completion

Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

FUEL GAUGE

MINI Hardtop (2016) - FUEL GAUGE - 1

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary.

The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Hints on refueling, refer to page 174.

TACHOMETER

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

ODOMETER AND TRIP ODOMETER

The concept

Odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Resetting the trip odometer

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Resetting the trip odometer - 1

Press the knob.

The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE

MINI Hardtop (2016) - EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE - 1

If the indicator drops to +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice

on roads.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE - 2

WARNING

Even at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

TIME

MINI Hardtop (2016) - TIME - 1

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Setting the time on the radio, refer to page 73.

DATE

MINI Hardtop (2016) - DATE - 1

The date is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the date on the radio, refer to page 73.

RANGE

Display

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Display - 1

With a low remaining range:

▶ A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
The remaining range is shown on the onboard computer.

With a dynamic driving style, e.g. taking curves aggressively, the engine function is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Display - 2

CAUTION

With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km it is possible that the engine will no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer

ensured. There is risk of property damage. Refuel promptly.

Displaying the cruising range

Press button.
2. "Settings"
3. "Instrument cluster display"
4. "Range"

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displaying the cruising range - 1

CURRENT FUEL CONSUMPTION

The concept

Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

The concept

After the ignition is turned on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance.

A service advisor can read out the current service requirements from your remote control.

Display

Detailed information on service requirements

The radio will display detailed information about service requirements.

itton.
2. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Vehicle status"

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Detailed information on service requirements - 1

  1. "Service required"
  2. Select the desired entry to view detailed information.

Symbols

Symbols Description

OK

No service is currently required.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbols - 1

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbols - 2

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the required inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

  1. MENU

  2. "Vehicle Info"

  3. "Vehicle status"

  4. "Service required"

  5. "§ Vehicle inspection" or "§ Emission inspection"

  6. "Change date"

  7. Enter the desired appointment.

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR

The concept

The system recommends the most fuel efficient gear for the current driving situation.

General information

Depending on the vehicle's features and country version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica-

tor is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift gear up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Manual transmission: displaying - 1

Fuel efficient gear is set.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Manual transmission: displaying - 2

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Steptronic transmission: displaying - 1

Fuel efficient gear is set.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Steptronic transmission: displaying - 2

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

SPEED LIMIT DETECTION

The concept

Speed limit detection

Speed limit detection shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

Without a navigation system, the system is subject to limitations imposed by technology.

Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed.

Information

Speed limits when towing a trailer are not shown.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visibility and traffic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

Overview

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior rear-view mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Instrument cluster display"
  4. "Speed limit information"

If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instrument cluster via the on-board compter.

Display

The following is displayed in the instrument cluster:

Speed limit detection

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Speed limit detection - 1

The last speed limit detected. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Speed limit detection - 2

Without navigation system: speed limit detection switched on but no speed limit or cancellation is detected.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▶ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
▶ When driving toward bright lights.
When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.
In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
▶ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

SELECTION LISTS IN THE IN-STRUMENT CLUSTER

The concept

With the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster the following can be displayed or operated:

▶ Current audio source.

It also displays programs of the Driving Dynamics Control.

Display

D BAYERN 3

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button the steering wheel Function

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating a list and adjusting the setting - 1

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating a list and adjusting the setting - 2

Activate the respective list and select the desired settings.

ON-BOARD COMPUTER

Calling up information on the info display

Close-up of a car's wheel hub with a white arrow pointing to the left side of the dial (no visible text or symbols)

Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.

Information is displayed in the info display of the instrument cluster.

Calling up information in the radio

Information is also shown on the radio display.

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Vehicle Info"
  3. "Onboard info"

Resetting values

  1. Select the desired value.
  2. "Reset?"

Information at a glance

Info display

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Info display - 1

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the info display:

Range.

▷ GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

▶ Average fuel consumption.
▶ Current fuel consumption.

▷ Average speed.
Date.
▶ Engine temperature display.
▶ Speed limit detection.
▷ Speed.

Radio

Selected information is shown on the radio.

▷ Range.
▶ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.

Adjusting the info display

You can select what information from the on-board compter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

MENU

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Instrument cluster display"
  4. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.

It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info

Description of GREEN info, refer to page 144.

Average fuel consumption

This is calculated for the period while the engine is running.

The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the on-board compter.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Close-up of a car wheel's steering wheel with a white arrow pointing to the dial (no visible text or symbols)

Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.

Engine temperature display

Displays the current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and motor oil temperature. As soon as the optimum operating temperature has been attained, the indicator is in the center position.

If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 198.

Speed limit detection

Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 69, function.

SPEED WARNING

The concept

Displays speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued.

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displaying, setting or changing the limit - 1

Press button.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Speed"
  3. "Warning at:"
  4. Turn the right knob until the desired limit is displayed.
  5. Press the right button.

The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit

utton.
1. MENU button.
2. "Settings"
3. "Speed"
4. "Warning"

Setting your current speed as the limit

utton.
1. MENU button.
2. "Settings"
3. "Speed"
4. "Select current speed"

The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.

SETTINGS ON THE RADIO

The following settings are created on the radio:

▷ Time, date.
▶ Formats, units of measure.

Formats and units of measure

utton.
1. MENU button.
2. "Settings"
3. "Language/Units"

  1. Select the desired format or unit of measure:

▷ "Language:"
▶ "Consumption:"
▶ "Distance:"
▷ "Pressure:"
▷ "Temperature:"

  1. Set the desired unit of measure or language.

Setting the time and date

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Time/Date"
  4. Select desired menu entry:

▷ "Time:"

▶ "Time format:"

▷ "Date:"

▶ "Date format:"

  1. Turn the right knob until the desired setting is selected.

LED RING ON THE CENTRAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

The concept

The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, for example the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for example the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer

Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning margins.

Display

1 2 3

▶ Arrow 1: current RPM.
▶ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
▶ Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Center Instrument"
  4. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Center Instrument"
  4. "Basic display" or "Event display"
  5. Select desired setting.

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

  1. MENU Press button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Center Instrument"
  4. "Brightness"
  5. Turn the right-hand knob.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

CHRONO PACKAGE IN THE COCKPIT

The concept

The Chrono package consists of three display instruments in the cockpit, where the engine oil pressure, the turbocharger boost, and the time are displayed. In addition, intermediate and total times can be measured using the stop watch.

The display elements of the Chrono package mainly support a sporty driving style, e.g., on racetracks.

Overview
1 2 3

1 Engine oil pressure display
2 Display of turbocharger boost
3 Time/stop watch

Engine oil pressure

The current engine oil pressure is displayed. At low temperatures, there can be an increase in the engine oil pressure.

Turbocharger boost

The current boost of the engine's turbocharger is displayed.

Stop watch

General information

The stop watch contains the following features:

▶ Measuring the total time.
▶ Measuring and storing of up to nine lap times.
▷ Displaying the time.

The red indicator light indicates that the stop watch is active.

Overview, buttons
MODE 1 2 3

▶ MODE button, arrow 1.
▶ START/STOP button, arrow 2.
▷ RESET/LAP buttons, arrow 3.

Displaying the measured times

The times measured using the stop watch are shown in minutes and seconds on the display. For times greater than 60 minutes, the numbers of hours and the minutes with seconds are alternatively displayed.

If the stop watch is running, the seconds are also shown using a seconds pointer in the scale of the display element.

Measuring the total time

  1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop watch.
  2. Press button, arrow 2, again to stop the stop watch.

Lap times

General information

It is possible to measure and store up to nine lap times. Older lap times are overwritten.

Measuring and storing a lap time

  1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop watch.
  2. Press button, arrow 3, to measure and store a lap time.
    The lap time is briefly shown in the display and via the seconds pointer of the stop watch, e.g., LAP 1 with the measured time. The stop watch continues running in the background.
  3. If needed, press button, arrow 3, again to measure a further lap time.

Calling up lap times

  1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until LAP 1 is shown on the display.
  2. Press button, arrow 2, to call up the individual lap times.

Deleting lap times

  1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until LAP 1 is shown on the display.
  2. Press button, arrow 3, to delete all stored lap times.

Displaying the time

The time is copied from the instrument cluster.

Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until the time is displayed.

LIGHTS

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

OVERVIEW

Switches in the vehicle
Interior view of a car dashboard with visible steering wheel, dashboard, and keyway (no text or symbols)

The light switch elements is located next to the steering wheel.

Light functions

Symbol Function

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Function - 1

Rear fog lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Function - 2

Front fog lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Function - 3

Automatic headlight control

Symbol Function

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Function - 1

Lights off

Daytime running lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Function - 2

Parking lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Function - 3

Low beams

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Function - 4

Instrument lighting

PARKING LIGHTS, CORNER- ING LIGHTS AND ROADSIDE PARKING LIGHTS

General information

Position of switch: 0,

MINI Hardtop (2016) - General information - 1

MINI Hardtop (2016) - General information - 2

If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lights

Position of switch:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Parking lights - 1

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

When parking, switch on the one-sided road-side parking lamp, refer to page 77.

Low beams

Position of switch:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Low beams - 1

The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

Roadside parking lights

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with bidirectional arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols visible)

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switch off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

WELCOME LIGHTS AND HEADLIGHT COURTESY DELAY FEATURE

Welcome lights

Depending on the equipment, when switching off the vehicle, switch position 📋 or .

The parking, low beam and interior lights light up briefly when unlocking the vehicle or depending on the ambient brightness.

Activating/deactivating

Set via radio.

  1. MENIJ button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Lighting"
  4. "Welcome light"

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Headlight courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration

Set via radio.

  1. MENU Press button.

  2. "Settings"

  3. "Lighting"

  4. "Pathway lighting:"

  5. Set length of time.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT CONTROL

The concept

The low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immediately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.

Activating

Position of switch: Ⓞ

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the low beams are switched on.

System limits

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions.

E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS

Position of switch: 0, 3DOE 10A

The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is switched off, the parking lights light up in position

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Set via radio.

  1. MENU button.

  2. "Settings"

  3. "Lighting"

  4. "Daytime running lamps"

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

CORNERING LAMP

Position of switch: 📋

When going around corners, the cornering light also lights the interior area of the curve. Below a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h when the turn signal is switched on and the steering angle is detected, there is automatic activation.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

Cornering light is disrupted or failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

HIGH-BEAM ASSISTANT

The concept

When the low beams are activated, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a camera on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are activated whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

Activating

Interior view of a car showing a directional knob and wheel (no text or symbols visible)

The High-beam Assistant can be activated when the low beams are activated.

  1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light switch into position for

  2. Press button on the turn signal lever, arrow.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are automatically brightened or dimmed.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating - 2

The blue indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.

Switching the high beams on and off manually

Close-up of a car interior showing a hand valve with two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2, indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols beyond arrows)

▶ High beams on, arrow 1.
▶ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever, refer to page 78.

System limits

The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situations where required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:

In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.
When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on freeways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.
When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

FOG LIGHTS

Front fog lights

The low beams must be switched on.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Front fog lights - 1

Press button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 77, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Rear fog lights

The low beams or front fog lights must be switched on.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Rear fog lights - 1

Press button. The yellow indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 77, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the rear fog lights.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

Adjusting

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Adjusting - 1

The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

General information

The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights and courtesy lights are controlled automatically.

Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these features.

Overview

2 1 3 2

1 Interior lights
2 Reading lamp
3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on and off

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching the interior lights on and off - 1

Press button.

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds.

Switch back on: press button.

Reading lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Reading lights - 1

Press button.

Reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

Depending on your optional features lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.

Activating/deactivating

Set via radio.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating/deactivating - 1

Press button.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Ambient lighting"

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing color - 1

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing color - 2

Push and hold the switch forward or back: automatic color change. Push

the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness

Via the thumb wheel you may adjust the brightness of the ambient light for the instrument lighting or radio.

Set via radio.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Setting the brightness - 1

utton.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Brightness"
  4. Set the desired brightness.

SAFETY

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

AIRBAGS

Interior view of a car with numbered anatomical labels pointing to key components such as steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel.

1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate restraint.

4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag

Side airbag

In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbag

In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Protective action

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information for optimum effect of the airbags

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information for optimum effect of the airbags - 1

WARNING

If the seat position is incorrect or the deployment area of the airbags is impacted, the airbag system cannot protect as intended or cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Observe the Information for optimum protective effect of the airbag system.

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▶ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
▶ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.
▶ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area.
There should be no persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the air-bag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.

Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS devices or' mobile phones.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
▶ Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of injuries. Do not touch individual components.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-

tion, the airbag system could not trigger as intended in the event of an accident despite respective accident severity. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Correct function - 1

When the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

▶ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on.
The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

The concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee and side airbag on the front passenger's side are either activated or deactivated.

Information

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety notes and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The ensure the front-seat passenger air-bag function, it must be detected, whether a person occupies the front passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to

life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
▶ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags

Top-down view of a car dashboard with front and rear seats (no visible text or symbols)

The indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The lamp indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags - 2

The indicator lamp lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint fixing system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child seats

The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, particularly in child seats required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/front passenger's airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger's seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed.

Calibrating the front seats

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Calibrating the front seats - 1

WARNING

There is risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment. An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

  1. Move the respective seat all the way forward.
  2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.

  3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR TPM

The concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure.

Information

With use of the system observe further information found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 178.

Functional requirements

The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable signaling of tire pressure loss is not assured.

Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.

Status display

The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Status display - 1

Press button.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

The status is displayed.

In addition, the current tire inflation pressures are displayed. It shows the actual values read; they may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Carry out reset

Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Carry out reset - 1

  1. Start the engine - do not drive off.
    Press button.
  2. "Vehicle Info"
  3. "Vehicle status"
  4. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
  5. To reset the tire pressure: "Perform reset"
  6. Drive away.

"Resetting..." is displayed.

After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure message

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Low tire pressure message - 1

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
A reset of the system was not carried out after a wheel was changed. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire pressures before the last reset.

  1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

  2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are la-beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Low tire pressure message - 2

WARNING

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Observe the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

  1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires.

The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility System, refer to page 188, can be used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service

center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

  1. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System, refer to page 188.

Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

  1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

  2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

  3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset. Then perform the reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driving style and road conditions.

A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.

A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or longer depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Continued driving with a flat tire - 1

WARNING

Your vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is reduced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is risk of an accident.

Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Required inflation pressure check message

A Check Control message is displayed in the following situations

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

▶ Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last confirmation.

In this case:

▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

- Carry out a reset of the system after a tire change.

System limits

The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re-

ported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.

Malfunction

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Malfunction - 1

The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.

Examples and recommendations in the following situations:

A wheel without TPM electronics is mounted, e.g. emergency wheel: Have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
Malfunction: Have system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.
▶ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: After leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM FLAT TIRE MONITOR

The concept

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

It detects a tire inflation pressure loss by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. This will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements

The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not assured. Initialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, e.g., whether the RPA is active.

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Vehicle Info"
  3. "Vehicle status"
  4. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

The status is displayed.

Initialization

When initializing the once set inflation tire pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

  1. MENIJ button.
  2. "Vehicle Info"

  3. "Vehicle status"

  4. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
  5. Start the engine - do not drive off.
  6. Start the initialization with "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM) reset".
  7. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indication of a flat tire - 1

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

  1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.
    Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are la-beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indication of a flat tire - 2

WARNING

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Observe the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if needed.

System limits

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▶ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.
▶ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▶ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

  1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires.

The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility System, refer to page 188, can be used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

  1. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System, refer to page 188.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

  1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

  2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

  3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driving style and road conditions.

A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.

A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or longer depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Continued driving with a flat tire - 1

WARNING

Your vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is reduced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is risk of an accident.

Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

INTELLIGENT SAFETY

The concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system.

The intelligent safety systems can hel prevent an imminent collision.

▶ Front-end collision warning with City Braking function, refer to page 91.

▶ Pedestrian warning with City Braking function, refer to page 94.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Indicators and warnings do not relieve from the personal responsibility. Due to system limits, warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, e.g. approach control warning with light braking function. There is risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Button in the vehicle - 2

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off - 1

Press button briefly:

The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

▶ LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently used.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off - 2

Press button again:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are activated.

The LED lights up green.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off - 3

Hold down button:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off.

The LED goes out.

FRONT-END COLLISION WARNING WITH CITY BRAK- ING FUNCTION

The concept

The system can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed.

The system sounds a warning before an imminent collision and actuates brakes independently if needed.

The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration.

The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror.

The front-end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally, the collision warning and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information

The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx.

3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range
Top-down view of three cars driving on a road with a shaded triangular area (no text or symbols)

It responds to objects if they are detected by the system.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Indicators and warnings do not relieve from the personal responsibility. Due to system limits, warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, e.g. approach control warning with light braking function. There is risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and circular vent (no visible text or symbols)

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Button in the vehicle - 2

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior rear-view mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving-off.

Switching on/off manually

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off manually - 1

Press button briefly:

The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

▶ LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently used.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off manually - 2

Press button again:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are activated.

The LED lights up green.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off manually - 3

Hold down button:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off.

The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set on the radio.

  1. Intelligent Safety button The intelligent safety menu is displayed for a brief time on the radio display.

  2. "Front. Coll. Warn."

  3. "Warning time"

  4. Setting the desired warning time

The selected warning time is stored for the profile currently used.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

Symbol Measure

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Measure - 1

Symbol lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Measure - 2

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Prewarning

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function

Acute warning in displayed in case of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous forewarning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Premise for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: During a braking intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restrictions are to be considered.

System limits

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus a system reaction might not come or might come late.

E. g. the following situations may not be detected:

▶ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
▶ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▶ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▶ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▶ If the field of view of the camera or the front windshield are dirty or covered.
▶ If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
▶ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an excess of false warnings.

PEDESTRIAN WARNING WITH CITY BRAKING FUNCTION

The concept

The system can help prevent accidents with pedestrians.

The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a collision with pedestrians and includes a braking function.

A camera at the base of the rearview mirror controls the system.

General information

With sufficient brightness, the system warns about possible collision danger with pedestrians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking before a collision.

Under those circumstances it reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range
graph TD A["Car"] --> B{Traffic Section} B -->|1| C["Exit"] B -->|2| D["Exit"] style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333 style D fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas

▶ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
▶ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Indicators and warnings do not relieve from the personal responsibility. Due to system limits, warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, e.g. approach control warning with light braking function. There is risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and digital display (no visible text or symbols)

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Overview - 2

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior rear-view mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving-off.

Switching on/off manually

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off manually - 1

Press button briefly:

The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

▶ LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently used.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off manually - 2

Press button again:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are activated.

The LED lights up green.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off manually - 3

Hold down button:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off.

The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Display - 1

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Premise for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: During a braking intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restrictions are to be considered.

System limits

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is limited.

Thus a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

E. g. the following situations may not be detected:

▶ Partially covered pedestrians.

▶ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
▶ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▶ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:

In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▶ If the field of view of the camera or the front windshield are dirty or covered.
▶ If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
▶ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.

BRAKE FORCE DISPLAY

The concept
Two grayscale 3D-rendered views of a camera lens showing the eye and lens (no text or symbols)

During normal brake application, the brake lights light up.

During heavy brake application, the flash-ers light up in addition.

POSTCRASH

In the event of an accident, the system can bring the car to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

Depressing the brake pedal can cause the vehicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also interrupts automatic braking.

After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

DRIVING STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEMS

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle contains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the engine.

BRAKE ASSISTANT

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

The concept

DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating.

DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle conditions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

Information

Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not even with DSC.

Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

When driving with roof load, e.g. with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may not be ensured in driving-critical situations due to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load.

Indicator/warning lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator/warning lights - 1

The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Deactivating DSC - 1

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSC

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating DSC - 1

Press button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator/warning lights - 1

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations:

The vehicle has a flat tire.
▶ When activating cruise control in TRACTION or DSC OFF mode.

DTC DYNAMIC TRACTION CONTROL

The concept

The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with somewhat limited driving stability.

Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Therefore drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds.
▶ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating DTC - 1

Press button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Deactivating DTC - 1

Press button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

PERFORMANCE CONTROL

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, with a correspondingly sporty driving style, wheels are braked individually.

DYNAMIC DAMPING CON- TROL

The concept

The tuning of the suspension can be changed with the system.

Programs

The system offers several different programs.

Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 99.

MID/GREEN

Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more comfort.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorbers for greater driving agility.

DRIVING DYNAMICS CON- TROL

The concept

The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose between three different programs. Driving Dynamics Control will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Driving Dynamics Control Program

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Operating the programs - 1

MID

GREEN

SPORT

MID

For balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

GREEN, refer to page 143, provides consistent tuning to maximize range.

Activating GREEN

Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

  1. Activate GREEN.
  2. "Configure GREEN"
  3. Configure the program.

Via radio

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "Driving mode"
  4. "Configure GREEN"
  5. Configure the program.

For vehicles without a configurable SPORT program:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Via radio - 1

  1. MENU button.
  2. "Settings"
  3. "GREEN Mode"
  4. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the engine control for greater driving agility.

With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of the suspension also changes and SPORT can be individually configured.

The configuration is stored for the profile currently used.

Activating SPORT

Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the left until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, SPORT can be individually configured.

Activating SPORT.

Select "Driving mode".

Configure the program.

Set via radio.

  1. MENU button.

  2. "Settings"

  3. "Driving mode"

  4. "Configure SPORT"

  5. Make the desired settings.

This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated.

Displays

Program selection

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Program selection - 1

With Driving Dynamics Control turned on a list of programs is displayed and can be selected.

Selected program

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Selected program - 1

The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT

This system supports driving off on inclines. The parking brake is not required.

  1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.

  2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

For vehicles with respective equipment versions, the possible holding duration amounts to 2 minutes.

DRIVING COMFORT

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

CAMERA-BASED CRUISE CON- TROL

The concept

Use this system to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads.

To the extent possible, the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you.

A camera on the interior rear view mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.

The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied.

For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.

To maintain a certain distance, the system automatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster.

As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accelerates to the desired speed.

The speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained uphill if engine power is insufficient.

General information

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Active cruise control is paused below approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

The system does not brake to a stop.

Depending on the driving program, refer to page 99, set, the characteristics of the cruise control in particular areas can change.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visibility and traffic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press button Function

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 1

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 102

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 2

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 103

Press button Function

RES CNCLPause cruise control, refer to page 102Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 103
Reduce distance, refer to page 103
Increase distance, refer to page 103
Increase, maintain, and store speed, refer to page 103
Reduce, maintain, and store speed, refer to page 103

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifications.

Camera
Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior rear-view mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on - 1

Press button on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument cluster lights up.
Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with symbol

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed.

Switch off

Press button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting

RES CNCLPress button on the steering wheel.

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

▷ When the brakes are applied.
▶ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
▶ If selector lever position N is set.
When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▶ If the detection range of the camera is impaired, e.g., by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun.
▶ If the vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Risk of accident due to too high speed differences to other vehicles, e.g. in the following situations:

▶ When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle.
▶ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own lane.
▶ When fast approaching standing vehicles.

There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

Maintaining/storing the speed

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Maintaining/storing the speed - 1

Press button.

Or:

Press +or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Maintaining/storing the speed - 2

The speed is displayed on the symbol. DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed.

Changing the speed

+ or -button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

+ or -button: hold down to repeat the corresponding action.

Distance

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Distance - 1

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Reduce distance - 1

Press button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Reduce distance - 2

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Increase distance

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Increase distance - 1

Press button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Increase distance - 2

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Continue cruise control

While driving

MINI Hardtop (2016) - While driving - 1

Press button with the system inter- rupted. Cruise control is continued with

the saved values. The selected distance is briefly displayed in the info display.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.

Changing between cruise control with/without distance control

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing between cruise control with/without distance control - 1

WARNING

The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.

Changing to Active Cruise Control without distance control:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

Press and hold this button, or

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 2

Press and hold this button.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 3

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

To switch back to cruise control, press one of the buttons briefly.

After switching, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Desired speed - 1

In addition to the indicator lamp, the desired speed is displayed in the central information display.

The indicator lights up green: the system is active.
The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted.
▶ No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the info display.

Distance display

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Distance display - 1

Distance 1

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Distance display - 2

Distance 2

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Distance display - 3

Distance 3

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Distance display - 4

Distance 4

This value is set automatically after the system is switched on.

Indicator/warning lights

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator/warning lights - 1

Symbol lights up orange:

A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator/warning lights - 2

Symbol flashes orange:

The conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator/warning lights - 3

Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator/warning lights - 4

The system has been interrupted or distance control is temporarily suppressed

because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator/warning lights - 5

Distance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

System limits

Speed range

The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Comply with the legal speed limit and safety distance in every situation when using the system.

Detection range
Top-down view of three cars driving on a road with a shaded triangular area (no text or symbols)

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Speed range - 2

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

Deceleration

The system also does not decelerate in the following situations:

In case of pedestrians, cyclists or similar slow road users.
▶ For red traffic lights.
▶ For cross traffic.
▶ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles
Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. This also applies to major speed differences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Deceleration - 2

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situa-

tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

Cornering

Top-down view of two cars driving on a curved road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols visible)

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

In tight curves the system offers only restricted detection where a vehicle ahead of you might be detected late or not at all.

Top-down view of two cars on a curved road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols visible)

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the gas pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather

In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles as well as short-term interrupttions for vehicles that are already detected. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g. by braking, steering or evading.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deactivated.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▶ If the field of view of the camera or the front windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▶ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

CRUISE CONTROL

The concept

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel.

The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking is insufficient.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations:

On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.

On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface.

There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

General information

Depending on the driving program, refer to page 99, set, the characteristics of the cruise control in particular areas can change.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press button Function
Cruise control on/off
Store speed
Pausing cruise controlContinue cruise control with the last setting
Increasing, maintaining or storing the speed
Reducing, maintaining or storing the speed

Controls

Switching on

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Controls - 1

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Controls - 2

The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed.

Switch off

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switch off - 1

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

Press button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Interrupting - 1

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

▷ When the brakes are applied.
▶ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
▶ If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed.
▶ If selector lever position N is set.
▶ If DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

Maintaining/storing the speed

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Maintaining/storing the speed - 1

Press button.

Or

+ or -button: press while the system is interrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

This is displayed in the instrument cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed.

Changing the speed

+ or -button: press repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

▶ or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

▶ or button: each time it is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle.

▶ or button: pressing it to the resistance point and holding it there accelerates

or decelerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continue cruise control

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Continue cruise control - 1

Press button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lamp

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Indicator lamp - 1

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster indicates whether the sys-

tem is switched on.

Desired speed

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Desired speed - 1

The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol.

The indicator lights up green: the system is active.

The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted.
▶ No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

PDC PARK DISTANCE CON- TROL

The concept

PDC supports you when parking. When you slowly approach an object with the rear of your car or with your front - depending on optional features - a signal tone is sounded:

General information

Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects.

The maneuvering range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given with the following circumstances:

By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▶ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent

Information

Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Due to high speeds when PDC is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet active.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Close-up of a car front-mounted control panel with labeled buttons (no readable text beyond icons)

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Button in the vehicle - 2

PDC Park Distance Control

Ultrasound sensors

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Ultrasound sensors - 1

PDC sensors on the vehicle.

Functional requirements

To ensure full functionality:

Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

To clean: when using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

PDC switches on automatically in the following situations:

▶ If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.
If, with the appropriate equipment, obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

You may turn off automatic activation via the radio:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on automatically - 1

Press button.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Parking"

  3. "Auto PDC"

  4. Select setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if needed.

Switching on/off manually

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off manually - 1

Press button.

On: the LED lights up.

▶ Off: the LED goes out.

Display

Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g. if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

If objects are located both in front of and to the rear of the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

  1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Volume - 1

  1. "Tone"

  2. "Volume settings"

  3. "PDC"

  4. To adjust: turn the controller.

  5. To store: press the controller.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:

▶ For small children and animals.

▶ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats.

▶ With external interference of the ultrasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

▶ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, extreme heat or strong wind.

▶ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

▶ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

▶ With moving objects.

▶ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

▶ With objects with corners and sharp edges.

▶ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.

▶ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings

PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.
▶ When sensors are covered in snow.
On rough road surfaces.
On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
In automatic car washes.
▶ Through heavy pollution.
Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

Malfunction

A Check Control message, refer to page 63, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

PARKING ASSISTANT

The concept
Top-down diagram of a road with cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and react accordingly.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 108.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property damage. Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automatically when the parking assistant is activated.

Overview

Button in the vehicle
Close-up of a car dashboard with multiple switches labeled P4, OP, START STOP, and Off (no readable text beyond labels)

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Overview - 2

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors
Close-up of a car's side profile with a white arrow pointing to a small circular mark on the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing.

To ensure full functionality:

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Do not put stickers over sensors.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces

▶ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▶ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

▶ Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▶ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▶ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Regarding the parking procedure

▶ Doors and tailgate closed.
▶ Parking brake released.
When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the button

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on with the button - 1

Press button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the radio.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

As soon as a suitable parking space is recognized by the system, the following query is displayed on the radio display: "Start vehicle parking?"

"OK": activate parking assistant.

"Cancel": cancel parking assistant.

Switch off

The system can be deactivated as follows:

▷ Press button.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switch off - 1

▷ Switch off the ignition.

Indicator of the radio display

System status

Symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space active.

▶ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the road as on the display.

The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been taken over by system.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated.

Parking using the parking assistant

WARNING

The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively interfere in the respective situations.

  1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate it if needed.

The status of the parking space search is indicated on the display.

  1. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indicated on the display.

  1. Adjust the parking position yourself if needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

▶ Press button.

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

▶ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering.
▶ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.
▶ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
▶ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.
▶ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▶ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays clearances that are too small.
▷ When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resume

An interrupted parking procedure can be continued if needed.

To do this, follow the instructions on the display.

System limits

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations:

In tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
On slippery ground.
▶ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.
▶ With a mounted emergency wheel.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:

▶ For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats.
▶ With external interference of the ultrasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.
▶ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, extreme heat or strong wind.
▶ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
▶ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▶ With moving objects.
▶ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
▶ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▶ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
▶ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

CLIMATE CONTROL

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

AIR CONDITIONER
1 2 3 OFF 9 8 7 6 5 4 A/C

1 Vent settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 38
5 Cooling function

6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 38

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air volume.

Switch off

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switch off - 1

Turn wheel for air quantity to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Temperature - 1

Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

Cooling function

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Cooling function - 1

Press button.

The air will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The air conditioner produces condensation water, refer to page 138, that will exit from below the car.

Recirculated-air mode

You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Recirculated-air mode - 1

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

▶ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Air flow, manual

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Air flow, manual - 1

Turn the ring to set the desired air volume.

The higher the rate, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Manual air distribution

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Manual air distribution - 1

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

Windows.
▶ Upper body region.
▶ Footwell.
Windows, upper body region, and foot-well.

Defrosts windows and removes condensation

Direct the air distribution toward windows, increase the air flow and temperature, and, if needed, use the cooling function.

Windshield defroster

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Windshield defroster - 1

Press button.

The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Rear window defroster - 1

Press button.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When Green mode, refer to page 143, is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated air mode the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air.

This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 200, of your vehicle.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

1 2 3 4 5 AUTO OFF 6 7 MAX A M A/C MAX A/C 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 38

9 Maximum cooling
10 Cooling function
11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosts windows and removes condensation

15 Seat heating, left 38

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air volume.

Switch off

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switch off - 1

Turn wheel for air quantity to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Temperature - 1

Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if needed by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant.

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Cooling function

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Cooling function - 1

Press button.

The air will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 138, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Maximum cooling

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Maximum cooling - 1

Press button.

The system is set to the lowest temperature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The function is available with external temperatures beyond approx. 32 °F/0 °C and with the engine running.

Adjust air flow with the program active.

AUTO program

MINI Hardtop (2016) - AUTO program - 1

Press button.

Air flow, air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell.

The cooling function, refer to page 118, and the automatic recirculation control, refer to page 119, are automatically also switched on in the AUTO program.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program activated, the automatic intensity control can be changed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Intensity of the AUTO program - 1

Turn the ring to set the desired intensity.

The selected intensity is displayed on the automatic climate control.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode - 1

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

▶ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▶ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automatically.
▶ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases.

If windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculating mode and press the AUTO button. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.

Air flow, manual

To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO program first.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Air flow, manual - 1

Turn the ring to set the desired air volume.

Automatic climate control displays the selected amount of air flow.

The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Manual air distribution

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Manual air distribution - 1

Press button repeatedly to select a program:

▶ Upper body region.
▶ Upper body region and footwell.
▶ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▶ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Windows.

Defrosts windows and removes condensation

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Defrosts windows and removes condensation - 1

Press button.

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

Adjust air flow with the program active.

If the windows fog over, also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button.

Windshield defroster

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Windshield defroster - 1

Press button.

The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Rear window defroster - 1

Press button.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When Green mode, refer to page 143, is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated air mode the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 200, of your vehicle.

VENTILATION

Setting

The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

▶ Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature.

Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is indirectly routed into the car's interior

Front ventilation

Close-up of a car's air vent with directional arrows indicating airflow or flow (no text or symbols)

▶ Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.
▶ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrow.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

UNIVERSAL INTEGRATED REMOTE CONTROL

The concept

The Universal Integrated Remote Control can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The Universal Integrated Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage door, using the universal garage door opener. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Compatibility - 1

If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is generally

compatible with the Universal Integrated Remote Control.

If you have any questions, please contact:

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Overview

1 2 3

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

  1. Switch on the ignition.

  2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED

on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

  1. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

  2. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be programmed on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will begin flashing slowly.

  3. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the handheld transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

  1. To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the interior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating-code wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternating-code system.

Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear-view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior

rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will repeat for approximately 20 seconds.

For systems with an alternating-code system, the Universal Integrated Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the operating manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

To synchronize:

  1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
  2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described.
  3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
  4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

  1. Switch on the ignition.
  2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed.
  3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

  4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

  5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror.

If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

Controls

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Controls - 1

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage door, using the universal garage door opener. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rearview mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rearview mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

DIGITAL COMPASS

Overview
2 1

1 Control button
2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

▶ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▶ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▶ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▶ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.
▶ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

| Region | Value | |--------|-------| | North America | 1 | | Europe | 2 | | Asia | 3 | | South America | 4 | | Africa | 5 | | Australia | 6 | | Central America | 7 | | Middle East | 8 | | Southeast Asia | 9 | | Eastern Europe | 10 | | Southern Europe | 11 | | Western Europe | 12 | | North America (…

Procedure

  1. Press and hold the control button for approx. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

  2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

The wrong compass point is displayed.

The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.

▶ Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure

  1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
  2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
  3. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds.

SUN VISOR

Glare shield

Fold the sun visor down or up.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

ASHTRAY/CIGARETTE LIGHTER

Overview
Interior view of a car gear shift lever system (no text or symbols visible)

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash-tray from the cupholder.

Lighter

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Lighter - 1

WARNING

Contact with hot heating elements or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against

the respective objects. There is risk of fire and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g. by carrying the remote control along when exiting the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is risk of property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

CONNECTING ELECTRICAL DE- VICES

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12V on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of property damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is risk of property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

WARNING

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, e.g. portable navigation devices, etc., can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior when unfolding. There is risk of injuries. make sure that

devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

Sockets

Sockets can be used for the running electrical devices with the engine running or with the ignition switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non-compatible connectors.

In the center console
Interior view of a car gear shift lever and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the trunk
Close-up of a car's front camera and dashboard with illuminated light source (no visible text or symbols)

The socket is located on the right side in the trunk.

USB INTERFACE

The concept

Connection for USB devices with music files.

Information

Observe the following when connecting:

Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface.
Do not connect any USB hard drives or USB hubs.
Do not use the USB interface for recharging external devices.

Overview
Close-up of a car interior showing a black seat with multiple circular switches and a white button labeled 'L' pointing to it (no text or symbols beyond the button)

The USB interface is located in the front of the center console.

CARGO AREA

Cargo cover

General information

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Loose objects in the car's interior can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. Secure loose objects in the car's interior.

Removing

For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

  1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.
  2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Interior view of a car showing a rear vent with a white arrow pointing to the backrest area (no text or symbols visible)

Installing

  1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.
  2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Enlarging the trunk

General information

The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest.

The rear backrest is divided 60–40. The back-rest of the left seat is connected to the backrest center section.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to folding down.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

With a rear backrest that is not locked, the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down side backrests

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the front or from the trunk.

Before the backrest is folded down, hook the corresponding safety belt into the safety belt on the side.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Pull the release upward and fold the backrest toward the front.

Folding back the backrest

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Folding back the backrest - 1

WARNING

With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in case of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the backrest engages into the locking after folding it back.

Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.

Adjusting the backrest tilt

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Adjusting the backrest tilt - 1

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

To transport bulky items, the trunk can be expanded by setting the backrests at a steeper angle.

  1. Released the back rest, and tilt it forward.
  2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

Interior view of a car showing the wheel, dashboard, and seatbelt (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Fold back and latch the backrest.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

INFORMATION

MINI Hardtop (2016) - INFORMATION - 1

WARNING

Loose objects in the car's interior can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. Secure loose objects in the car's interior.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.

OVERVIEW

The following storage compartments are available in the vehicle interior:

Storage compartment in front of the cupholders.
▶ Storage tray in the center console.
▶ Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.

▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.

Opening

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted directional arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

COMPARTMENTS IN THE DOORS

MINI Hardtop (2016) - COMPARTMENTS IN THE DOORS - 1

WARNING

Breakable object, e.g. glass bottle, can break in the event of an accident. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is risk of injuries. Do not stow any breakable objects in the car's interior.

CENTER ARMREST

The center armrest contains a storage compartment.

Opening
Close-up of a car's rear seat and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm rest upward, arrow 2.

Adjusting the height
Close-up of a car seatbelt with two directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center arm rest upward or downward into the desired height, arrow 2.

CUPHOLDERS

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot beverages can damage the cup holder and increase the risk of injuries in the event of an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.

Front
Close-up of a car intake manifold with two cups and a lever handle (no text or symbols visible)

In the center console.

Rear
Interior view of a car showing leather seat compartments and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

On 3-door models: in front of the rear seats and in the and in the side armrests.

Interior view of a car seatbelt and dashboard compartment showing black leather seats and a white circular component (no text or symbols visible)

On 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.

CLOTHES HOOKS

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CLOTHES HOOKS - 1

WARNING

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is risk of an accident. When suspending clothing articles from the hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries and risk of property damage. Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear.

STORAGE SPACE UNDER CARGO FLOOR PANEL

Top-down view of a car interior showing the rear compartment with a highlighted rectangular area and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

To remove the onboard vehicle tool kit, fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward.

VARIABLE TRUNK FLOOR

With the variable trunk floor, the trunk can be configured corresponding to transport requirements. To do this, remove the trunk floor, and insert it in the desired position.

Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 139.

Removing the cargo floor panel

Interior view of a vehicle showing a white rectangular component with an arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

On 5-door models: To change the position of the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear part of the cargo floor panel.

Interior view of a car showing the rear compartment of a vehicle with a white plastic tray (no text or symbols visible)

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the supports.

The cargo floor panel can be removed from the trunk above the tail lamps.

Lower position

Interior view of a car showing the backrest area with plastic sheet inside (no text or symbols visible)

▶ Larger objects can be transported.
▶ Space for smaller objects remains between the fixed and variable trunk floor.

Folded up position

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Folded up position - 1

WARNING

Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries and risk of property damage.

Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to separate the cargo area and vehicle interior in the sense of a partition net.
▶ Only use the variable cargo floor in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.

▶ Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, e.g.

Interior view of a car showing the hood and engine compartment with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower position and push it behind the locks, arrow.

You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Upper position

Interior view of a car showing the backrest panel and side compartments (no text or symbols visible)

▶ With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading surface is produced.
On 3-door models:

Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.

On 5-door models:

Maximum load in this position: 441 lbs/200 kg.

▷ Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable trunk floor.

Nighttime street scene with illuminated buildings and a dark road, no visible text or signage

DRIVE ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

THINGS TO REMEMBER WHEN DRIVING

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

BREAKING-IN PERIOD

General information

Moving parts need time to adjust to one another (break-in time).

The following instructions will help accomplish a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 61.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal performance between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components above-mentioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

GENERAL DRIVING NOTES

Closing the tailgate

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Closing the tailgate - 1

WARNING

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Do not drive with the tailgate open.

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

▶ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▶ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▶ Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust system

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Hot exhaust system - 1

WARNING

During driving operation, high temperatures can occur underneath the body, e.g. caused by the exhaust gas system. If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage.

Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust system.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Mobile communication devices in the vehicle - 1

WARNING

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the send operations of mobile phones. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual disturbance and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Driving through water - 1

CAUTION

When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the engine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is risk of property damage. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.

Drive through calm water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Braking safely

Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature.

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the movement area around pedals and floor area

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Objects in the movement area around pedals and floor area - 1

WARNING

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, e.g. for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, press brake pedal ever so gently every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads.

In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Hills - 1

WARNING

Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

In idle or with the engine switched off, safety-relevant functions are restricted or not available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the engine or braking force and steering support. There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle or with the engine switched off.

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts. Otherwise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are furthered by:

▶ Low mileage.
▶ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
▶ Infrequent use of the brakes.

Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking is not reached - thus discs don't get cleaned.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally that cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops collecting underneath the vehicle.

These traces of water under the vehicle are normal.

Ground clearance

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Ground clearance - 1

CAUTION

If ground clearance is insufficient, there might be contact with the front or rear spoiler e.g. when driving over curbs or entering into underground car parking garages. There is risk of property damage. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available.

LOADING

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

INFORMATION

MINI Hardtop (2016) - INFORMATION - 1

WARNING

High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally, and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is risk of property damage. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

WARNING

Loose objects in the car's interior can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. Secure loose objects in the car's interior.

DETERMINING THE LOAD LIMIT

  1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

  2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

  3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

  1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

LOAD

On 3-door models

+ ≤ Max. Load + ≤ Max. Load + ≤ Max. Load

On 5-door models

+ ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

STOWING CARGO

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▶ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
▶ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▶ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

SECURING CARGO

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

▶ Smaller and lighter items: secure with retaining straps or with draw straps.
▶ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps.

Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

2 2 1 2 3 1 2

Without storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, arrow 1, in the cargo area.

With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

ROOF-MOUNTED LUGGAGE RACK

Information

Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing

Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sun-roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The roof load should not extend past the loading area.
▶ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.
▶ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps.
Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate.
▶ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

REAR LUGGAGE RACK

General information

Installation only possible with rear luggage rack preparation.

Rear racks are available as special accessories.

Information

Follow the installation instructions of the rear luggage rack.

Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Securing

COOPER/COOPER D/ONE/ONE D
1 2 1 2

COOPER S/COOPER SD
Top-down view of a car's rear bumper with numbered labels pointing to the front and side panels.

The anchorage points, arrow 1, and the socket, arrow 2, are located below the covers in the bumper.

Remove the covers before installing the rear luggage rack.

Power consumption

Before starting to drive, check the function of the tail lamps of the rear luggage rack.

The rear luggage rack lights must not consume more than:

▶ Turn signals: 42 watts per side.
▶ Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
▶ Brake lights: 84 watts in total.
▶ Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.
▶ Backup lamp: 42 watts in total.

SAVING FUEL

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emissions.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environmental impact.

REMOVE UNNECESSARY CARGO

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

REMOVE ATTACHED PARTS FOLLOWING USE

Remove roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

CLOSE THE WINDOWS AND GLASS SUNROOF

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

TIRES

General information

Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

DRIVE AWAY WITHOUT DE- LAY

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

LOOK WELL AHEAD WHEN DRIVING

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

AVOID HIGH ENGINE SPEEDS

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Starting with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed.

The gear shift indicator, refer to page 68, of your vehicle indicates the most fuel efficient gear.

USE COASTING CONDITIONS

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE DURING LONGER STOPS

Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

SWITCH OFF ANY FUNCTIONS THAT ARE NOT CURRENTLY NEEDED

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

HAVE MAINTENANCE CARRIED OUT

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI recommends that maintenance work be performed by a MINI dealer's service center.

For information on the MINI Maintenance Systems, refer to page 200.

GREEN MODE

The concept

The GREEN mode supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted.

For Steptronic transmission:

The Coasting driving condition is enabled under certain conditions.

Under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in selector lever position D. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged. An indicator provides information about the distance traveled in Coasting mode.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized fuel consumption driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Overview

The system includes the following MINIMAL functions and displays:

▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 144.
▷ GREEN tips driving instruction, refer to page 145.
▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 144.
▶ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 145.

Activating GREEN mode

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating GREEN mode - 1

Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until GREEN mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN mode

Via radio

  1. "Settings"

  2. Select between "Driving mode" or "GREEN Mode"

Configure the program.

GREEN tip

"GREEN speed warning":

Displays a reminder when the set GREEN mode speed is exceeded.

GREEN climate control

"GREEN climate control":

Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.

By making a slight change to the set temperature, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior fuel consumption can be economized.

The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior Additionally heat output to seats and exterior mirror is reduced.

Exterior mirror heat is available when outside temperatures are very low.

Coasting

Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and Coasting, refer to page 145, with the engine idling.

This function is only available in GREEN mode.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

MINI Hardtop (2016) - GREEN bonus range - 1

An adjusted driving style helps you extend your driving range.

This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

▷ Green display: efficient driving style.
▶ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.

Driving style

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Driving style - 1

A bar display in the instrument cluster indicates your current driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by

coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.

Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the bar's color:

▷ Green display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the green range.
▶ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.

The display switches to green as soon as all conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving are met.

GREEN tip driving instruction

D GREEN + 46.8 km

Instructions tell you to switch to a more fuel-efficient driving style when you back off the accelerator.

Information

The driving style display and GREEN mode tips in the instrument cluster appear when the GREEN mode display is activated.

Activating driving style and GREEN mode tips:

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Instrument cluster"
  3. "GREEN Info"

GREEN tip symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Symbol Measure

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Measure - 1

For efficient driving back off the accelerator or delay accelerating to allow time to assess road conditions.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Measure - 2

Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Measure - 3

Steptronic transmission: switch from M/S to D or avoid manual shift interventions.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Measure - 4

Manual transmission: follow shifting instructions.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Symbol Measure - 5

Manual transmission: engage neutral for engine stop.

Coasting

The concept

The system helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again.

Information

Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving mode, refer to page 143.

Coasting is automatically activated when GREEN mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 99.

The function is available in a certain speed range.

A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Safety mode

The function is not available under one of the following conditions.

▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
- Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▶ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing excessive current.
▶ Cruise control activated.

Functional requirements

In GREEN mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, approx. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are met:

▶ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
▶ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Display in the instrument cluster - 1

The mark in the bar display below the tachometer is highlighted green and appears at the zero point. The tachometer approximately indicates idle speed.

Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated via the radio, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill.

  1. "Settings"
  2. Select between "Driving mode" or "GREEN Mode"
  3. "Coasting"

Settings are saved for the profile currently being used.

Black-and-white photo of a Mini Cooper car with illuminated '6RIH533' license plate, no visible text or symbols on the vehicle itself.

ROCK ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

TONE

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP-TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Settings are stored for the profile, refer to page 24, currently used.

TREBLE, BASS, BALANCE, AND FADER

General information

▶ "Treble": treble adjustment.
▶ "Bass": depth adjustment.
▶ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▶ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Adjusting treble, bass, balance, and fader

  1. "Settings", Radio" or "Media"

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Adjusting treble, bass, balance, and fader - 1

  1. "Tone"
  2. Select the desired tone settings.
  3. Set the desired value.

VOLUME

General information

▶ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume control.
▶ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared to the entertainment sound output.
▶ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the safety belt reminder, compared to the entertainment sound output.
▶ "Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone call.
▶ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call.

The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone:

"Microphone", "Loudspeak.".

Adjusting

  1. "Settings", Radio" or "Media"
  2. "Tone"
  3. "Volume settings"
  4. Select the desired volume setting.
  5. Set the desired value.

RESETTING THE TONE SET- TINGS

  1. "Settings", Radio" or "Media"
  2. "Tone"
  3. "Reset"

RADIO

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Settings are stored for the profile, refer to page 24, currently used.

OVERVIEW
1 BAND 2 MENU 3 BACK 4 OPTION 5 RADIO MEDIA TEL 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Change waveband

2 Opening the main menu

3 Menu level back

4 Selecting menu items

▶ Turn: highlight the menu item in the display or adjust the value.

▶ Press: select the highlighted menu item or store the setting.

5 Open the options for the respective menu

6 Programmable memory buttons

7 "Media": open the menu

8 "Radio": open the menu

9 Changing the station

SOUND OUTPUT

Switching on/off

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching on/off - 1

If the ignition is switched off: press the left button.

Muting

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Muting - 1

If the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the left button.

AM/FM STATION

General information

A list of the stations that can be received for the FM and AM wavelengths is displayed.

Symbol Meaning

MINI Hardtop (2016) - General information - 1

Station is played.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - General information - 2

Station is saved.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - General information - 3

Station can be saved.

Selecting a station

  1. "Radio"

  2. "FM" or "AM"

  3. Select a station.

Selecting a station manually

  1. "Radio"
  2. "FM" or "AM"
  3. "Manual search ( )"
  4. Turn the right-hand knob until the desired frequency is displayed.

Changing the station

About the radio:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the station - 1

Press button.

Via the buttons on the steering wheel:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the station - 2

Press button.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the station - 3

The next station with reception or stored station is played. If traffic bulletins are activated, the next traffic information station is played.

About the radio:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the station - 4

Press and hold this button.

Via the buttons on the steering wheel:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the station - 5

Press and hold this button.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the station - 6

The waveband is traversed. After the button is released, the next station with reception is played.

Storing a station

  1. "Radio"

  2. "FM" or "AM"

  3. Select a station.

  4. Press the right button.

  5. Select the memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the Favorites buttons, refer to page 153.

Renaming a station

When storing a station with RDS signal, the RDS information transferred during storing is accepted as the station name. This name can be changed.

  1. Select the station that is to be renamed.

  2. OPTION Press button.

  3. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait until the desired name appears.

  1. Press the right-hand knob to store this name.

Displaying additional information

If a radio station broadcasts radio text or radio text plus, this information can be displayed, e.g., the track or the performer of the music. Availability, content and sequence are set by the radio station.

  1. "Radio"

  2. "FM" or "AM"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "Station info"

RDS Radio Data System

The concept

RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band.

When playing a station with multiple frequencies, the system automatically switches to the frequency with the best reception, if needed.

Switching on/off

It is recommended to switch on RDS

  1. "Radio"

  2. "FM"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "RDS"

HD Radio™ reception

Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals.

License conditions

HD Radio technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U. S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and "Arc" logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception

  1. "Radio"

  2. "FM" or "AM"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "HD Radio reception"

H) This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital.

When setting a station with a digital signal, it may take a few seconds before the station plays in digital quality.

Information about HD Radio stations whose station name ends with ...HD or with ...HD1:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Information about HD Radio multicast stations whose station name ends with ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, there may be interruptions of the audible signal lasting several seconds. This depends on the reception.

Displaying additional information

Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

  1. Select the desired station.

  2. OPTION Press button.

  3. "Station info"

STORED STATIONS

General information

It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Symbol Meaning

1 ... 40 Memory location.

FM Stations out of the FM waveband.

AM Stations out of the AM waveband.

SAT Satellite radio station.

Calling up a station

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Presets"

  3. Select the desired memory location.

Storing a station

The station currently selected is stored.

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Presets"

  3. "Store station ( )"

  4. Memory location to be selected.

The stations can also be stored on the Favorites buttons, refer to page 153.

Programmable memory buttons

The first eight locations in the station list correspond to the assignment of the Favorites keys.

To store the station:

  1. Select a station.

  2. Press and hold Favorites button until a signal sounds.

Calling up a station:

  1. Press Favorites button.

Shifting stations

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Presets"

  3. Select the station that is to be moved.

  4. OPTION Press button.

  5. "Move entry"

  6. Select the memory location.

Deleting a station

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Presets"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "Delete entry"

Deleting all stations

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Presets"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "Delete presets"

  5. Confirm "Are you sure you want to delete all saved stations?".

SATELLITE RADIO

General information

The channels are offered in predefined packages. The packages must be subscribed by phone.

Managing a subscription

To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. This is usually the case when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.

Enabling channels

The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Satellite radio"

  3. Select the Unsubscribed category.

  4. Select the channel.

  5. OPTION Press button.

  6. "Manage subscription"

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

  1. Select the displayed phone number to subscribe to the channel.

The serial number, ESN, is needed to subscribe.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Satellite radio"

  3. Select the channel.

  4. OPTION Press button.

  5. "Manage subscription"

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

  1. Select the displayed phone number to unsubscribe from the channel.

The serial number, ESN, is needed to unsubscribe.

Selecting channels

You can only listen to enabled channels.

  1. "Radio"
  2. "Satellite radio"
  3. Select categories.
  4. Select the channel.

The selected channel is stored in the remote control currently used.

Changing the channel

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the channel - 1

Press button.

Storing a channel

  1. "Radio"
  2. "Satellite radio"
  3. Select the channel.
  4. Press the right button.
  5. Select the memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control currently used.

The channels can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons.

Weather & Traffic jump

Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region

  1. "Radio"

  2. "Satellite radio"

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Selecting a region - 1

Press button.

  1. "Set area:"
  2. Select region.

The region is stored in the remote control currently used.

Activating/deactivating the jump

Reception must be guaranteed in order to activate or deactivate.

  1. "Radio"
  2. "Satellite radio"

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Activating/deactivating the jump - 1

Press button.

  1. OPTION Press button.

  2. "Weather & Traffic Jump"

Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available.

Information

▶ Reception may not be available in some situations, such as under certain environmental or topographic conditions.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages; next to tall buildings; or near trees, mountains or powerful sources of radio interference.

MULTIMEDIA

EXTERNAL DEVICES

The concept

Various external devices can be connected to the vehicle. Sound is played back through the vehicle loudspeakers. The system can be operated via the radio, depending on how the external device is connected to the vehicle.

Symbol Meaning

MINI Hardtop (2016) - The concept - 1

AUX-IN port.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - The concept - 2

USB audio interface.

Overview
1 FM/AM 2 MENU 3 BACK 4 OPTION 5 RADIO MEDIA TEL 9 8 7 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Change waveband
2 Opening the main menu
3 Menu level back
4 Selecting menu items

▶ Turn: highlight the menu item in the display or adjust the value.
▷ Press: select the highlighted menu item or store the setting.

5 Open the options for the respective menu
6 Programmable memory buttons
7 "Media": open the menu
8 "Radio": open the menu
9 Changing the track

AUX-IN port

Overview

For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3 players. Sound is played back on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The sound relies on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting
Close-up of a car interior showing a black plastic door with multiple circular buttons and a white indicator button (no text or symbols visible)

The AUX-In port is located at the front of the center console.

Connect the headphones or the line-out connector of the device to the AUX-in port.

Playback

  1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track on the audio device.
  2. "Media"
  3. "AUX"

Volume

The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, we recommend adjusting the volume.

Adjusting the volume

  1. "Media"
  2. "AUX"
  3. "Volume"
  4. Set the desired volume.

USB audio interface

Overview

It is possible to connect external devices. Set via radio. Sound is played back on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Connectors for external devices

Connection via USB audio interface: Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 players, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

Due to the large number of audio devices available on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device/mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, for example bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s or the number of different compression technologies, the files may not play back correctly in each case.

Information about compatible USB devices can be found at www.miniusa.com/bluetooth.

Audio files

Standard audio files and playlists can be played back.

File systems

Popular file systems for USB devices are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

USB device connection

Close-up of a car interior panel with no visible text or symbols

The USB port is located at the front of the center console.

Use a flexible adapter cable for connecting to help protect the USB audio port and the USB device from mechanical damage. The adapter cable supplied with the USB device would be ideal.

After the first connection

Information about the tracks and directories stored on the USB device is transferred into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device, the number of tracks and the folder structure.

Number of tracks

Information for a maximum of 9999 tracks and directories can be stored in the vehicle.

Copy protection

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management, DRM, cannot be played.

Playback

  1. "Media"

  2. "USB device"

Playback is started.

Music tracks can be searched in three ways.

▶ Track from the current playlist.
▶ Via playlists stored in the audio device.

▶ Via the directory structure in the audio device.

Current playback

List of tracks that is currently being played. E. g. the list of tracks that was found in the track search or a playlist.

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"
  3. "Current playback"
  4. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

Searching directories

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"
  3. "Browse directory"

Directories and titles at the top directory level are displayed. Should the USB device support external memory cards, their directories are also displayed.

  1. Select the directory.
  2. Select the track at which the playback is to begin. Tracks in subdirectories are not played back.

Playback lists

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"
  3. "Playlists"
  4. Select the playback list.

Changing the track

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the track - 1

Press button.

A reel is made to the previous/next track from the currently played one.

Fast forward/reverse

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Fast forward/reverse - 1

Press and hold this button.

The current track is fast forwarded/rewound with increasing speed.

Playback information

Information about the current track can be displayed, such as the artist and the name of the track. This information is stored in the audio file and does not have to match the file name of the track.

Switching playback information on/off

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "Show playback information"

Random playback

Playback in random order can be selected for all tracks of the USB device or for the current play.

Switching random playback for all tracks on/off

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "All titles"

Switching random playback for the current playback on/off

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"

  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. "Current playback"

Apple iPod/iPhone port

Close-up of a car's front seat with circular buttons and a white indicator button (no text or symbols visible)

The USB port is located at the front of the center console.

Use a flexible adapter cable for connecting, e.g., the original iPod/iPhone adapter cable.

The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.

Track search

Music tracks can searched in various ways.

▶ Track from the current playlist.
▶ Via playlists stored in the iPod/iPhone.
▶ Via the categories saved for the music tracks, e.g., type of music, artist, composer, album, track.
▶ In the media audio books and podcasts.

Current playback

List of tracks that is currently being played. E. g. the list of tracks that was found in the track search or a playlist.

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"
  3. "Current playback"
  4. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

Playback lists

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"
  3. "Playlists"

  4. Select the playback list.

  5. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

Categories

  1. "Media"
  2. "USB device"
  3. Select the category.
    ▷ "Genres"
    ▶ "Artists"
    ▷ "Composers"
    ▶ "Albums"
    ▷ "Titles"
    ▶ "Audio books"
    ▷ "Podcasts"

  4. A-Z search to reduce the list to a beginning letter to be entered.

  5. Select the track at which the playback is to begin.

Changing the track

About the radio:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the track - 1

Press button.

Via the buttons on the steering wheel:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the track - 2

Press button.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Changing the track - 3

A reel is made to the previous/next track from the currently played one.

Fast forward/reverse

About the radio:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Fast forward/reverse - 1

Press and hold this button.

Via the buttons on the steering wheel:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Fast forward/reverse - 2

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Fast forward/reverse - 3

Press and hold this button.

The current track is fast forwarded/rewound with increasing speed.

Random playback

The tracks of the current playback are played back in random order.

Switching random playback on/off

  1. "Media"

  2. "USB device"

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Switching random playback on/off - 1

Press button.

  1. "Random"

MI NI 1014

CONNECT ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE SYSTEM

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

THE CONCEPT

Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. After the mobile phones are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on. As soon as they are inside the vehicle they can be operated via the radio and via the buttons on the steering wheel.

INFORMATION

MINI Hardtop (2016) - INFORMATION - 1

WARNING

Operating the integrated information system and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. If necessary stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider. At high temperatures, the charge functions of the mobile phone can be limited under certain circumstances, and some functions are no longer executed.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle, refer to the operating manual of the mobile phone.

COMPATIBLE MOBILE PHONES

Accurate information about which mobile phones are supported with a Bluetooth interface is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.

These compatible mobile phones, with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below.

Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number

The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone installation package. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number - 1

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Bluetooth® info"
  3. "System information"

PAIRING/UNPAIRING THE MOBILE PHONE

Requirements

The mobile phone is compatible.

The mobile phone is ready for operation.
The ignition is switched on.
▶ Bluetooth connection on the vehicle and on the mobile phone activated.
Bluetooth presets may need to be made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.
▷ Set Bluetooth passkey for one-time use in the logon procedure.
▶ Vehicle is stationary.

Bluetooth activation/deactivation

  1. "Telephone"
  2. OPTION Press button.
  3. "Bluetooth®"

Pairing and connecting

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Pairing and connecting - 1

WARNING

Operating the integrated information system and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. If necessary stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

  1. "Telephone"

  2. A mobile phone has not yet been paired: "OK"

A mobile phone has been paired: "Bluetooth®"

  1. A mobile phone has not yet been paired: the Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display.

A mobile phone has not yet been paired: "Add new phone". The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display.

  1. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. Select this.

  1. Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and on the display

or

Compare the control number on the display with the control number in the display of the mobile phone and confirm.

Four mobile phones can be logged in on the vehicle, and one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle.

Following the initial pairing

Mobile phone is connected to the vehicle after a brief time.

The phone book entries stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle.

Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a secure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Bluetooth®"

  3. Select the mobile phone that is to be connected.

Unpairing the mobile phone

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Bluetooth®"
  3. OPTION Press button.

  4. Highlight any mobile phone that is to be removed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Unpairing the mobile phone - 1

  1. "Remove device" or "Remove all devices"

What to do if...

Information on compatible mobile phones, refer to page 164.

The mobile phone could not be paired or connected.

▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and on the radio.
Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Do the control numbers on the mobile phone and vehicle match? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? Delete connections to other devices.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining battery life? Charge the mobile phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts?

▶ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▶ Ambient temperature too high or too low? Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

No or not all phone book entries are displayed, or they are incomplete.

▶ Transmission of the entries is not yet complete.
It is possible that only the phone book entries from the mobile phone or from the SIM card are transmitted.
It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.
The number of phone book entries being stored is too high.

The phone connection quality is poor.

It may be possible to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone.
Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

CONTROLS

Adjusting the volume

During an active call, turn the left knob on the radio until the desired volume is selected.

Automatic volume control

The automatic volume control can only be adjusted during an active conversation.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Tone"
  3. "Volume settings"
  4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
  5. Adjusting: press and turn right button.
  6. Storing: press right button.

Incoming call

Receiving calls

If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number or "Unknown caller" s displayed.

Accepting a call

About the radio

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

MINI Hardtop (2016) - About the radio - 1

Press button.

Via the instrument cluster

"Accept"

Rejecting a call

About the radio

"Reject"

Via the instrument cluster

"Reject"

Ending a call

About the radio

"End call ( )"

Via the button on the steering wheel

MINI Hardtop (2016) - About the radio - 1

Press button.

Via the instrument cluster

"End call"

Dialing a number

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Dial number"
  3. Enter numbers using the right rotary knob.
  4. Select the symbol.

Calls with multiple parties

Accepting a second call

If a second call is received during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal sounds.

"Accept"

The second call is accepted and the current call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call

Establish an additional call during an active call.

Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Phone book"
▶ "Outgoing calls"
▶ "Received calls"

The first call is put on hold.

Switching between two calls, hold call

You can switch between two calls.

Select line with symbol in order to switch between the conversations.
Active conversation.
Call on hold.

Establishing/ending a conference call

Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.

  1. Establish two calls.
  2. "Conference call"

When terminating the conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call is continued if needed.

Muting the microphone

When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

"Mute microphone"

The muted microphone is automatically muted:

▶ When a new connection is established.
▶ If using call-switching to switch between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing

DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining access to network services or for controlling devices, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose. The DTMF code is only available during an active call.

  1. "Keypad dialing"
  2. Enter DTMF code.

Favorites

Up to 12 phone numbers can be stored in the Favorites. Only the occupied places of the Favorites list are displayed.

Storing Favorites

  1. "Telephone"

  2. "Favorites"

  3. "Add favorite"

  4. Select the list from which the entry is to be added:

▶ "Phone book"
▶ "Outgoing calls"
▶ "Received calls"

  1. Select entry from list and desired phone number.
  2. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Move favorite

  1. Highlight the desired favorite.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Move favorite - 1

Press button and "Move favorite".

or

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

  1. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Remove from Favorites

  1. Highlight the desired favorite.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Remove from Favorites - 1

Press button.

  1. "Remove from favorites"

Deleting Favorites

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Deleting Favorites - 1

tton.

  1. "Delete favorites"
  2. "OK"

Phone book

General information

The telephone accesses the contacts stored in the mobile phone. All contacts for which a telephone number is entered are displayed. Maximally 4 phone numbers per contact can be displayed.

Displaying

Phone book entries are automatically transmitted from the mobile phone to the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. Fig. 4 Entries in the phone book: "Keyword search"

  1. "Telephone"

  2. "Phone book"

The symbols show how the entries are stored on the mobile phone.

Symbol Meaning

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displaying - 1

Mobile phone number.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displaying - 2

Home phone number.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displaying - 3

Business phone number.

Selecting the sorting order of the names

The phone book entries can be displayed in different sequences. Depending on how the contacts are stored in the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting order.

  1. Press button.

  2. "Display:" Last/First name" or "First/Last name"

  3. "First name Last name" or "Last name, First name"

Calling

  1. Select contact.
  2. Select the desired phone number.

Add phone numbers to Favorites

  1. Mark the entry from the list.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Add phone numbers to Favorites - 1

  1. OPTION Press button and "Add to favorites".

or

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

  1. Select the desired phone number as needed.
  2. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Redialing

The list of the last 20 numbers of the mobile phone selected are displayed.

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Redial"

Add phone numbers to Favorites

  1. Mark the entry from the list.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Add phone numbers to Favorites - 1

  1. OPTION Press button and "Add to favorites".

or

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

  1. Select the desired phone number as needed.
  2. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Dialing the number via the instrument cluster

This is possible when there is no active call.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Dialing the number via the instrument cluster - 1

  1. Press button on the steering wheel.

The last numbers selected are displayed in the instrument cluster.

  1. If necessary, select another number.

  2. Press the key again to establish the connection.

Received calls

The list of the 20 last received or missed calls of the cell phone are displayed.

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Received calls"

Add phone numbers to Favorites

  1. Mark the entry from the list.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Add phone numbers to Favorites - 1

  1. OPTION Press button and "Add to favorites".

or

Press the right button, and select the phone number.

  1. Select the desired phone number as needed.
  2. Insert and select the cursor at the desired place in the Favorites.

Hands-free system

General information

Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-free system

Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on.

Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free system.

If the system does not switch over automatically, follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone

Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone.

Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Black and white photo of a curved tunnel with motion blur, framed by a purple border (no text or symbols visible)

MOVE ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

REFUELING

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

INFORMATION

Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 176, prior to refueling.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - INFORMATION - 1

CAUTION

With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km it is possible that the engine will no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer ensured. There is risk of property damage. Refuel promptly.

FUEL LID

Opening

  1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a circular arrow icon (no text or symbols)

  1. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car door handle with a circular vent and arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

  1. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Close-up of a car's front wheel assembly with a white arrow pointing to the dial (no text or symbols visible)

Closing

  1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

  2. Close the fuel filler flap.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Closing - 1

WARNING

The retaining strap of the fuel cap be jammed and crushed during closing. In this case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the lid.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction. The release is located in the trunk.

Close-up of a car door handle with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Remove the cover.

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.

This releases the fuel filler flap.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN REFUELING

MINI Hardtop (2016) - OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN REFUELING - 1

CAUTION

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.

On contact with painted surfaces, damage may occur to these surfaces. The environment is polluted. There is risk of property damage.

Avoid overfilling.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.

FUEL

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

General information

Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter helps make a cold start easier, e.g.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

Even fuels that conform to the specifications can be of low quality. This may cause engine problems, for instance poor engine start-up behavior, poor handling and/or poor performance. There is risk of property damage. In case of engine problems, switch gas stations or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Gasoline - 1

CAUTION

Even small amounts of wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. There is risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

▶ Leaded gasoline.

▶ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling.

Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806-xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is risk of property damage. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol percentage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.

MINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Minimum fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 89.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Minimum fuel grade - 1

CAUTION

Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is risk of property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled maintenance.

WHEELS AND TIRES

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

Safety information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

The service life of the tires.

Road safety.

▶ Driving comfort.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Checking the tire inflation pressure - 1

WARNING

A tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. There is risk of an accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a month and before a long trip.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.

Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflation pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure specifications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar.

For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

▶ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

▶ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Checking the inflation pressure of the emergency wheel

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a specific area (no visible text or symbols)

Located behind the bumper on the underside of the vehicle is an opening for checking the tire inflation pressure.

Pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 179, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

▶ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▶ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 179, and adjust as necessary.

Close-up of a car's front and side panels showing structural components (no visible text or symbols)

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Silhouette of a car with four human figures above it and a box on the side, no text or symbols present.

175/60 R 16 86 H M2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
+S XL RSC
175/65 R 15 84 H M
+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M
+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H
Std
195/55 R 16 87 H M
+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL
RSC

Emergency wheel T 115/70 R 15 90 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M +S XL RSC2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
Silhouette of a car with human figures and a box, no text or symbols present

185/50 R 17 86 H M 2.9 /42 2.7 / 39

+S XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88 W

XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL RSC

205/40 R 18 86 W

XL RSC

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
Silhouette of a car with four human figures above and a briefcase on the side (no text or symbols)

175/65 R 15 84 H M 2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33

+S A/S Std

175/65 R 15 84 H M

+S Std

175/65 R 15 84 H

Std

195/55 R 16 87 H M

+S RSC

195/55 R 16 87 V M

+S A/S RSC

195/55 R 16 87 W

RSC

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

205/45 R 17 88 V M2.5 / 36 2.4 / 35
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
Emergency wheelSpeed up to a max. of
T 115/70 R 15 90 M50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M +S XL RSC2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

WARNING In order to

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Silhouette of a car with four human figures above and a box on the side, no text or symbols present.

175/65 R 15 84 HM+S A/S Std2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
175/65 R 15 84 HM+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 HStd
175/60 R 16 86 HM+S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 HM+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 VM+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 WRSC
205/45 R 17 88 VM+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 VM+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XLRSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XLRSC
Compact wheelSpeed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 115/70 R 15 90 M4.2 / 60

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Silhouette of a car with human silhouettes and a box, no text or symbols present

195/55 R 16 87 H M2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M3.1 / 45 2.9 /42
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL
RSC

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Silhouette of a car with human figures and a box, no text or symbols present

185/50 R 17 86 H

3.1 / 45 2.9 /42

M+S XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88 W

XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL RSC

205/40 R 18 86 W

3.4 / 49 3.2 / 46

XL RSC

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Silhouette of a car with four human figures above and a briefcase on the side, no text or symbols present.

175/65 R 15 84 H M

2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38

+S A/S Std

175/65 R 15 84 H M

+S Std

175/65 R 15 84 H

Std

195/55 R 16 87 H M

+S RSC

195/55 R 16 87 V M

+S A/S RSC

195/55 R 16 87 W

RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88 W

XL RSC

175/60 R 16 86 H M

2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

+S XL RSC

205/40 R 18 86 W

XL RSC

Compact wheel

Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 M

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
Silhouette of a car with human silhouettes and a cargo box, no text or symbols present

195/55 R 16 87 H M

2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

+S RSC

195/55 R 16 87 V M

+S A/S RSC

195/55 R 16 87 W

RSC

175/60 R 16 86 H M

3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45

+S XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M

+S XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88 W XL

RSC

205/40 R 18 86 W XL

RSC

TIRE IDENTIFICATION MARKS

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

F: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter

T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0115: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

DOT ... 0115: the tire was manufactured in the 1st week of 2015.

Recommendation

Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded

  1. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Temperature - 1

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC - Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

TIRE TREAD

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm.

Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth
Abstract 3D rendering of layered geometric structures with no visible text or symbols

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

TIRE DAMAGE

General information

Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Information

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

▶ Unusual vibrations while driving.

▶ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is risk of an accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is risk of an accident. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Mounting

Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the right wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer.

Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Wheel and tire combination - 1

WARNING

Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, e. g. due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is risk of an accident.

Close-up of a weather tire with a star symbol on the side (no text or symbols present)

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Retreaded tires - 1

WARNING

Retreated tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is risk of an accident. Do not use retreated tires.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. The plate is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere to the permissible maximum speed.

Run-flat tires

If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop will be glad to answer additional questions at any time.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions.

The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop will be glad to answer additional questions at any time.

After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct if needed.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

RUN-FLAT TIRES

Label
Close-up of a car tire with a circular logo on the wheel (no visible text or symbols)

RSC label on the tire sidewall.

The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 89.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 86.

Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop will be glad to answer additional questions at any time.

REPAIRING A FLAT TIRE

Safety measures

▶ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
▶ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
▶ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

MOBILITY SYSTEM

The concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.

The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Information

▶ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container.
▶ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm or more.
Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▶ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire.
▶ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.
The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

Storage

The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel.

Sealant container

2 1

▶ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▶ Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

Labeled diagram of a medical or laboratory device with numbered components including a box, cable, and connector.

1 On/off switch
2 Holder for bottle
3 Reduce inflation pressure
4 Inflation pressure dial
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor

Filling the tire with sealant

  1. Shake the sealant container.

3D rendered mechanical component with vertical double-headed arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

  1. Take the connection hose completely out of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.

Illustration of a car wheel connected to a mechanical device with cable and connector (no text or symbols)

  1. Attach the connection hose to the connector of the sealant container, ensuring that it engages audibly.

Diagram showing a tire, mechanical component, and cable connection (no text or symbols)

  1. Slide the sealant container upright into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.

Diagram showing a car wheel connected to a sensor device with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

  1. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.

Diagram showing a film reel connected to an electronic device with cable, no visible text or symbols

  1. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into a power socket inside the vehicle.

Illustration of a handheld electronic device with a coiled cable (no text or symbols visible)

  1. With the ignition turned on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

3D rendering of a rectangular electronic device with internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols visible)

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

CAUTION The cover

The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is risk of property damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 min.

If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not reached:

  1. Switch off the compressor.
  2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
  3. Drive forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.
  4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Stowing the Mobility System

  1. Remove the connection hose of the sealant container from the wheel.
  2. Remove the connection hose from the sealant container.

  3. Wrap the empty sealant container and connection hose in suitable material to avoid dirtying the trunk.

  4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 mls/10 km/h to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

To correct the tire inflation pressure

  1. Stop at a suitable location.

  2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve stem.

Illustration of a film reel connected to an electronic device with cable, no text or symbols present

  1. Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor.

Illustration of a rectangular electronic device with a coiled cable and ports, no text or symbols present.

  1. Insert the connector into a power socket inside the vehicle.

Illustration of a handheld electronic device with a coiled cable (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar.

▶ Increase pressure: with the ignition turned on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

To reduce the pressure: press the button on the compressor.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 88.

Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 84.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System as soon as possible.

SNOW CHAINS

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:

175/65 R 15.

175/60 R 16.

John Cooper Works:

185/50 R 17.

Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.

Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

IMPORTANT FEATURES IN THE ENGINE COMP.

2 3 4 5 6 1 MINI

1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
6 Coolant reservoir

HOOD

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage components and lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components can move in the engine compartment with the vehicle switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. There is risk of injuries. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is risk of property damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

WARNING

There are protruding parts, e.g. lock hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep these areas clear.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed on opening and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

Opening the hood

  1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked.

Close-up of a vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

  1. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Close-up of a car's grille and grille with a white arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

Let the hood fall from approx. 16 in/40 cm, arrow. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

ENGINE OIL

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions.

The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for example:

▶ Sporty driving style.
▶ Break-in of the engine.
▶ Idling of the engine.
▶ With use of engine oil types that are not approved.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.

The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement.

The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

▶ Status display.
▶ Detailed measurement.

ELECTRONIC OIL MEASUREMENT

Status display

The concept

The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the radio display.

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

With frequent short-distance trips, perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil level

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displaying the engine oil level - 1

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Engine oil level display messages

Different messages appear on the display depending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages.

If the engine oil level is too low within the next 125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to page 196.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Engine oil level display messages - 1

CAUTION

A too low engine oil level causes engine

damage. There is risk of property damage. Immediately add engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of property damage. Do not add too much engine oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Detailed measurement

The concept

In the detailed measurement the engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Requirements

▶ Vehicle is on level road.
▶ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed.
▶ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▶ Engine is running and is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement

In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level:

Confirm message regarding engine oil level display.

The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Time: approx. 1 minute.

ADDING ENGINE OIL

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

A too low engine oil level causes engine damage. There is risk of property damage.

Add engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of property damage. Do not add too much engine oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

WARNING

Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Observe the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

General information

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument cluster.

Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 193.

Opening the oil filler neck

  1. Open the hood, refer to page 194.

  2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise, arrow.

Close-up of a circular object with a white arrow pointing to it, next to a partial view of a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Add motor oil.

After refilling, perform a detailed measurement, refer to page 196.

ENGINE OIL TYPES TO ADD

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

Oil additives can damage the engine.

There is risk of property damage. Do not use oil additives.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 2

CAUTION

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is risk of property damage. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct viscosity grade.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Viscosity grades

When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, SAE 5W-30, 0W-20 or 5W-20.

Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

More information about suitable engine oil ratings and viscosities of engine oils can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Gasoline engine

API SL or superior oil rating

ENGINE OIL CHANGE

MINI Hardtop (2016) - ENGINE OIL CHANGE - 1

CAUTION

Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is risk of property damage. Do not exceed the service data indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the motor oil.

MINI recommends

MINI Original Engine Oil.

COOLANT

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

INFORMATION

MINI Hardtop (2016) - INFORMATION - 1

WARNING

With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is risk of injuries and risk of property damage. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

COOLANT LEVEL

Overview

Opening the hood, refer to page 194

The coolant reservoir is in the engine compartment, refer to page 193.

Checking

There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

  1. Let the engine cool.
  2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

Close-up of a car engine bay with visible components and a circular arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

  1. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

max mn

Adding

  1. Let the engine cool.
  2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular arrow indicating a specific feature (no visible text or symbols)

  1. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

  2. Close cap.

  3. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

DISPOSAL

MINI Hardtop (2016) - DISPOSAL - 1

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

MAINTENANCE

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases scopes and intervals may vary according to the country-specific version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

CONDITION BASED SERVICE CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service recognizes the maintenance requirements.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

Detailed information on service requirements, refer to page 68, can be displayed on the radio.

Service data in the remote control

Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. The dealer's service center can read this data out and suggest an optimized maintenance scope for your vehicle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

SERVICE AND WARRANTY IN- FORMATION BOOKLET FOR US MODELS AND WARRANTY AND SERVICE GUIDE BOOK- LET FOR CANADIAN MODELS

Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

SOCKET FOR OBD ONBOARD DIAGNOSIS

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions. There is risk of property damage. The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly recommends access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center, another qualified service center or repair shop or other authorized persons.

Position

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Emissions - 1

The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control

components, in particular the catalytic converter.

REPLACING COMPONENTS

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

ONBOARD VEHICLE TOOL KIT

Close-up of a mechanical component with internal cutouts and puzzle pieces (no visible text or symbols)

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the trough under the trunk floor.

Top-down view of a transparent plastic container with internal compartments and a central knob (no visible text or symbols)

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield without the wiper blades installed, the windshield can be damaged. There is risk of property damage. Secure the wiper arm when replacing the wiper blades and do not fold down the wipers without the wiper blades installed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is risk of property damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades

  1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
  2. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Abstract 3D rendering of a curved surface with a white arrow pointing left, no text or symbols present

  1. Pull the wiper blade down first out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

Then pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.

Close-up of a medical or surgical tool with two labeled arrows (1 and 2) pointing to a curved, elongated object against a black background (no text or symbols on the tool itself)

  1. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in reverse order.
  2. Fold down the wipers.

Replace rear wiper blade

  1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
  2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating rotation or force direction (no text or symbols)

  1. Continue turning the wiper blade all the way so that it pops out of the holder.
  2. Press the new wiper blade into the holder until you hear it snap into place.
  3. Fold the wipers in.

LAMP AND BULB REPLACE- MENT

General information

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have appropriate work performed by a

dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare lamp box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Information

Lights and bulbs

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Lights and bulbs - 1

WARNING

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

Contaminated bulbs reduce their service life. There is risk of property damage. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source.

These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) - 1

WARNING

Too intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources for an extended period of time. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the external lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If despite driving with the lights switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Front lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Halogen headlights
1 2

1 Low beams/high beams

2 Turn signal

LED headlights
1 2 3

1 Daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams
3 Turn signal

Bug light
1 2 3

1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights

LED bug light
Close-up of a car wheel or engine component with labeled parts (1 and 2), showing internal structure without any text or symbols beyond labels.

1 Parking lights
2 Fog lights

LED low beams/LED high beams

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

The lights feature LED technology. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop in the event of a malfunction.

Halogen low beams/halogen high beams

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

Bulbs: H4

  1. Open the hood, refer to page 194.
  2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and remove.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with a white arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Pull off the connector.
  2. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.

Close-up of a mechanical component with circular opening and internal mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Remove the bulb from the headlight housing.
  2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Turn signal

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

Bulbs: PW24W

With white turn signal lights: PWY24W

  1. Turn the steering wheel.
  2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove.

Close-up of a car tire with two circular buttons and directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

  1. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise, and remove it.

Close-up of a car tire wheel with a circular arrow indicating rotation or direction (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if needed, loosen it with small tilting movements if possible.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular housing and internal components (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
  2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

LED parking lights/LED fog lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

The lights feature LED technology. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop in the event of a malfunction.

Parking lights/fog lights/daytime running lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

Bulbs:

Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W Parking lights for LED headlights: W5W NBV
Daytime running light: PSX24W
Fog lamp: H8

Replacing the bulbs

  1. Turn the steering wheel.
  2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and remove.

Close-up of a car tire and dashboard with directional arrows indicating rotation or cycle (no text or symbols)

  1. Remove the corresponding connector.
  2. Remove the bulb holder.

▶ Turn the parking light bulb holder counter-clockwise, arrow 1, and remove.
▶ Press together the upper and lower locking of the daytime running lights

bulb holder, arrow 2, and remove the bulb holder.

For better accessibility, if needed, remove the bulb of the fog lamp beforehand.

▶ Turn the fog light bulb holder counterclockwise, arrow 3, and remove.

1 2 3

  1. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
  2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

The daytime running lights bulb holder engages audibly, first below, then above.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Vehicles with a rear fog lamp
1 2 3 4

1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lamp
3 License plate lamp
4 Center brake lamp

Vehicle with two rear fog lights

1 2 3 4 1 2

1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate lamp
4 Center brake lamp

Side tail lights

1 2 3

1 Brake lights/tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lights

1 2 3 1 4

1 Tail lights
2 Turn signal

3 Brake light
4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

Bulbs: P21W

  1. Open tailgate, refer to page 27.
  2. Remove left or right cover.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow symbol on its side (no text or symbols present)

  1. Through the opening, loosen the plug connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Press the latches together, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.

1 1 2

  1. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
  2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

▶ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights
▶ Arrow 2: turn signal

▶ Arrow 3: reversing light

1 2 1 3

  1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake lamp and license plate lamp

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

The lights feature LED technology. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop in the event of a malfunction.

Vehicles with a rear fog lamp

Follow the general instructions on Lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

Bulbs: W16W

  1. On vehicles with heat shield: Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with three white arrows pointing upward, no visible text or symbols

  1. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog lamp.

  2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

Close-up of a car interior with a white arrow pointing to a specific area, no visible text or symbols

  1. Replace nonworking bulb.

  2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Vehicle with two rear fog lights

Follow the general instructions on Lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

Bulbs: W16W

Left rear fog lamp:

  1. On vehicles with heat shield: Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

Close-up of a mechanical component with three white arrows pointing to a small bolt and two upward-pointing arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols present)

  1. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog lamp.

  2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

Close-up of a car's lower suspension system with an arrow pointing to the vehicle wheel (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Replace nonworking bulb.
  2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Right fog lamp:

  1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

Close-up of a vehicle's lower body and suspension components, showing no visible text or symbols

  1. Replace nonworking bulb.
  2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 203.

Bulbs:

▶ With orange lens: W5W

▶ With white lens: WY5W diadem

  1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn signal lights are on the left and right next to the hinges of the hood.

Close-up of a mechanical component with visible parts and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

  1. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and remove the cover.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a gear-like structure and mounting bracket (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a curved arrow indicating direction (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Replace the bulb.
  2. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal. Insert the nuts of the cover and press down.

CHANGING WHEELS

Information

When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.

Which is why no spare tire is available.

The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

Close-up of a car wheel rim and rear wheel with white arrows pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the positions shown.

Emergency wheel

Safety measures

Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system.

▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in position P P.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

▶ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp at an appropriate distance.

▶ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the

vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the side.

Do not place wood blocks or similar items under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot reach its carrying capacity because of the restricted height.
▶ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine; otherwise, a fatal hazard exists.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Removing the emergency wheel

The emergency wheel is housed in a well on the underbody of the vehicle. The screw connection of the emergency wheel is in the cargo area underneath the floor mat, on the floor of the storage compartment for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

  1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Mechanical component diagram showing internal gear and housing (no text or symbols)

  1. Remove the retaining plate.

  2. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread and hold in place with one hand.

Close-up of a car's front bumper with cutouts and a white arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emergency wheel well using the hexagon attached to retaining plate.

Close-up of a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols

  1. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel wrench.
  2. Unscrewing the wheel wrench
  3. Pull out the well with emergency wheel under the vehicle toward the rear.
  4. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel from the well.
  5. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Prepare wheel change

  1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to page 210.
  2. With the wheel chock from the onboard vehicle tool kit, also secure the vehicle against rolling away at the front wheel of the opposite side. For this, place the wheel chock behind the front wheel diagonally across.
  3. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking up the vehicle

  1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel such that the vehicle jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle jacking point with the entire surface on the ground.

Side view of a car showing wheel rim and side panel with two white arrows pointing upward (no text or symbols)

  1. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectangular recess of the jacking point for cranking it up.
  2. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts off of the ground.

Wheel mounting

Mount one emergency wheel only.

  1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove the wheel.
  2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two bolts.
    If original MINI light alloy wheels are not mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also have to be used.
  3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
  4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle jack.

After the wheel change

  1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
  2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored in the emergency wheel bracket because of its size.

  3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.

  4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 88.

Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 85.

  1. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.

Driving with emergency wheel

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Driving with emergency wheel - 1

WARNING

The emergency wheel has particular dimensions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur at higher speeds, e.g. reduced lane stability when braking, longer braking distance and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

After the trip with emergency wheel

Have the following work performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

  1. Replace the damaged tires as soon as possible.
  2. Replace the emergency wheel with a new wheel.
  3. Have the tray with the emergency wheel installed.

VEHICLE BATTERY

Maintenance

The battery is maintenance-free.

The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery.

More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Battery replacement

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Battery replacement - 1

CAUTION

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions.There is risk of property damage. Information on the compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer's service center.

After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle battery be registered on the vehicle by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop to ensure that all comfort features are fully available and that any Check Control messages of these comfort features are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

General information

Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

The battery may need to be charged in the following cases:

▷ When making frequent short-distance drives.
▶ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, longer than a month.
▶ Steptronic transmission: when parked for long periods of time in selector lever position D, R or N.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12V on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of property damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 215, in the engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, e. g.:

Time: update.
Date: update.
▶ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions again.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to page 35.

Disposing of old batteries

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Disposing of old batteries - 1

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

FUSES

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Replacing fuse

The fuses are located in the passenger footwell under the dashboard.

  1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and labeled parts (no text or symbols beyond basic diagram)

  1. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2. Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.

  2. Replace the fuse in question.

  3. The installation is done in reverse order from the removal.

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

HAZARD WARNING FLASH-ERS

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, dashboard display, and circular vent (no visible text or symbols)

The button is located above the radio.

WARNING TRIANGLE

Top-down view of a transparent plastic car trunk with internal compartments and a central knob (no visible text or symbols)

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

FIRST-AID KIT

The first-aid kit is located in the trunk.

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

JUMP-STARTING

General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.

Preparation

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Preparation - 1

CAUTION

In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-starting. There is risk of property damage. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

  1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This information can be found on the battery.
  2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
  3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Starting aid terminals - 1

WARNING

If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, sparks formation can occur. There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.

Close-up of a car engine bay with a white arrow pointing to a component on the top (no visible text or symbols)

The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive terminal.

Open the lid of the starting aid terminal.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a small feature, no visible text or symbols.

The body ground acts as the negative terminal of the battery.

Connecting the cables

  1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
  2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
  3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
  4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
  5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

  1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
  2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.
    If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

  3. Let both engines run for several minutes.

  4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.

Check the battery and recharge if needed.

TOW-STARTING AND TOWING

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, e.g. approach control warning with light braking function. There is risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Switching off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to page 90.

Steptronic transmission: transporting your vehicle

Information

Your vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is risk of property damage. Have vehicle transported only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform.

Tow truck

Three grayscale line drawings of a flatbed truck with a cargo plane, showing different vehicle positions (no text or symbols)

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Tow truck - 2

CAUTION

When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; damage can occur on vehicle parts. There is risk of property damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.

Use tow fitting located in the front only for positioning the vehicle.

Manual transmission

Observe before towing your vehicle

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Towing

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Towing - 1

CAUTION

If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is risk of property damage. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Information the following instructions:

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force

needs to be applied when braking and steering.

▶ Larger steering wheel movements are required.
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.

Tow truck
Three line-drawn truck scenarios showing different types of loading or maintenance, with no visible text or symbols.

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 2

CAUTION

When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; damage can occur on vehicle parts. There is risk of property damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.

Towing other vehicles

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

WARNING

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. There is risk of an accident! Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.
▶ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:

▶ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Tow rope - 1

CAUTION

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow fitting

General information

3D rendered image of a metallic hook-shaped tool with threaded end (no text or symbols)

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the MINI.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 202, are together in the cargo area.

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there can be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is risk of property damage. Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.

Use of the tow fitting:

▶ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▶ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
▶ Use tow fitting located in the front only for positioning the vehicle.
▶ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Side-by-side comparison of a car's front and side profiles, showing engine and dashboard components (no text or symbols)

COOPER/COOPER D ONE/ONE D

Side-by-side comparison of a car's front and side views, showing engine, grille, and dashboard components (no text or symbols)

COOPER S/COOPER SD

Side profile of a Mini Cooper car showing front grille and grille (no text or symbols visible)

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 214. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

  1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
  2. Ignition, refer to page 49, on.
  3. Engage third gear.
  4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again.
  5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system.
  6. Have the vehicle checked.

CARE

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

CAR WASHES

General information

Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Information

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

When cleaning with high-pressure washers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is risk of property damage. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.

Distances and temperature

▶ Maximum temperature: 140 °F/60 °C.
▶ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals: 12 in/30 cm.

▶ Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 inches/80 cm.

Automatic car washes

Information

▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
▶ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▶ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.
▷ Unscrew the rod antenna.
▶ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 56, to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instructions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 31.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Information - 1

CAUTION

Too high guide rails in car washes can damage body parts. There is risk of property damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm.

Before driving into a car wash

In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:

Manual transmission:

  1. Drive into the car wash.
  2. Shift to neutral.
  3. Switch the engine off.
  4. Switch on the ignition.

Steptronic transmission:

  1. Drive into the car wash.

  2. Engage selector lever position N.

  3. Make sure that the parking brake is released.

  4. Press the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and two Check-Control messages are displayed.

A signal sounds when you leave the vehicle while in selector lever position N.

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

To start the engine with manual transmission:

  1. Press on the clutch pedal.

  2. Press the Start/Stop button.

To start the engine with Steptronic transmission:

  1. Depress the brake pedal.

  2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Headlights

Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers.

Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.

Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

VEHICLE CARE

Car care products

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends using care and cleaning products from MINI.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Car care products - 1

WARNING

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is risk of injuries. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.

Vehicle paint

Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Suitable care products are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Upholstery material care

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Upholstery material care - 1

CAUTION

Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is risk of property damage. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 °F/60 °C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For cleaning, use only water and suitable care products, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends original MINI care products.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

These include:

▷ Imitation leather surfaces.

▶ Roofliner.

▷ Lamp lenses.

▶ Instrument cluster cover.

▶ Matt black spray-coated components.

▶ Painted parts in the interior.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Do not soak the roofliner.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Plastic components - 1

CAUTION

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is risk of property damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Safety belts

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Safety belts - 1

WARNING

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is risk of injuries or danger to

life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Do not allow the switches to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Carpets and floor mats - 1

WARNING

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, e.g. for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Displays/Screens - 1

CAUTION

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is risk of property damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

MINI Hardtop (2016) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is risk of property damage. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Black-and-white photo of eyeglasses and a white wallet on a dark surface, no text or symbols visible.

FIND ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

TECHNICAL DATA

VEHICLE FEATURES AND OP- TIONS

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

INFORMATION

The technical data and specifications in this Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for example, due to the selected special equipment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed values can be necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

found in the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

The information in the vehicle documents always has priority.

DIMENSIONS

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example, due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI 3-door
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68.0/1,727
Height inches/mm 55.7/1,414
Length
Cooper inches/mm 151.1/3,837
Cooper S inches/mm 151.9/3,858
John Cooper Works inches/mm152.5/3,874
Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.4/10.8
MINI 5-door
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68.0/1,727
Height inches/mm 56.1/1,425
Length
Cooper inches/mm 157.4/3,998
Cooper S inches/mm 158.0/4,013
Wheelbase inches/mm 101.1/2,567
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.2/11.02

WEIGHTS

The values preceding the slash apply to vehicles with manual transmission; the values following

the slash apply to vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

MINI Cooper, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs3,455/3,520
kg1,567/1,597
Load lbs680
kg308
Approved front axle load lbs1,920/1,990
kg871/903
Approved rear axle load lbs1,665
kg755
Approved roof load capacity lbs132
kg60
Cargo area capacity cu ft8.7-34.0
Liters211-731
MINI Cooper, 5-door
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs3,680/3,750
kg1,669/1,701
Load lbs775
kg352
Approved front axle load lbs1,995/2,065
kg905/937
Approved rear axle load lbs1,840
kg835
Approved roof load capacity lbs165
kg75
Cargo area capacity cu ft13.1-40.7
Liters278-941
MINI Cooper S, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs3,620/3,650
kg1,642/1,656
Load lbs775/770
kg352/349
Approved front axle load lbs2,025/2,060
kg919/934
Approved rear axle load lbs1,690
kg767
Approved roof load capacity lbs132
kg60
Cargo area capacity cu ft8.7-34.0
Liters211-731
MINI Cooper S, 5-door
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs3,860/3,900
kg1,751/1,769
Load lbs885/885
kg401/401
Approved front axle load lbs2,085/2,125
kg946/964
Approved rear axle load lbs1,880
kg853
Approved roof load capacity lbs165
kg75
Cargo area capacity cu ft13.1-40.7
Liters278-941
MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs3,720/3,765
kg1,687/1,708
Load lbs775
kg352
Approved front axle load lbs2,065/2,105
kg937/955
Approved rear axle load lbs1,725
kg782
Approved roof load capacity lbs132
kg60
Cargo area capacity cu ft8.7-34.0
Liters246-963

CAPACITIES

MINI

Fuel tank, approx. Fuel quality, refer to

page 176

Cooper US gal/liters 11.6/44

Cooper S, John Cooper Works US gal/liters 11.6/44

APPENDIX

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

ACTIVE PEDESTRIAN PROTEC- TION SYSTEM

Opposite to the description in this Owner's Manual, the active pedestrian protection system is only deployed at speeds between approx. 30 km/h/approx. 18 mph and 55 km/h/34 mph.

LICENSE TEXTS AND CERTIFICATIONS

BLUETOOTH

Brazil

MINI Hardtop (2016) - BLUETOOTH - 1

ANATEL

MODELO FC6000N

2230-13-3133

MINI Hardtop (2016) - BLUETOOTH - 2

(01) 07898926774036

Register model name: UK001

Product code: MRBE307A

Hrvatski

Ovim, Alpine, izjavljuje da ovaj tip RADIO UKL zadovoljava bitne zahtjeve i ostale važece odrednice, a sukladno Smjernici 1999/5/EC.

Čeština

Hereby, Alpine, declares that this RADIO UKL is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Taiwan

第十二條

USA (FCC) and Canada (IC)

Register model name: UK002

Product code: MRBE309A

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

USA

FCC ID: KR5S180052056

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

South Korea

Continental S180052056

KCC-CRM-TAL-S180052056

Abstract geometric logo design with stylized letter K (no text or symbols)

Europe

Declaration of Conformity in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)

Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH

Product type designation: S180052056

Intended use: Tire pressure monitoring system

The product mentioned above complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC, when used for its intended purpose:

Health and safety pursuant to Art. 3(1)(a):

Applied standard(s):

EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009 + A1:2010 + A12:2011

EN 62479:2010

Electromagnetic compatibility pursuant to Art. 3(1)(b):

Applied standard(s):

EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1 (2008-04)

EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1 (2002-08)

Efficient use of spectrum pursuant to Art. 3(2):

Applied standard(s):

EN 300 220-1 V2.3.1 (2010-02)

EN 300 220-2 V2.3.1 (2010-02)

The following marking applies to the above mentioned product:

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Europe - 1

Hrvatski

Ovim, Continental Automotive GmbH, izjavljuje da ovaj tip TPMS zadovoljava bitne zahtjeve i ostale važece odrednice, a sukladno Smjernici 1999/5/EC.

Čeština

Hereby, Continental Automotive GmbH, declares that this TPMS is in compliance with the

essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

A. The use of this product does not need a wireless operation license.
B. The product does not include an RF disturbance protection, and should not disturb other licensed products.
C. It is forbidden to replace the antenna or to make any change in this product.

Australia/New Zealand

MINI Hardtop (2016) - Australia/New Zealand - 1

N1374

Russia

C-DE-ML05.H01232

South Africa

ICASA TA-2013/831

China

In accordance with the provisions on the Radio Regulations of the people's Republic of China, the radio transmission equipment, after examination, conforms to the provisions with its CMIIT ID: 2013DJ7376

INFORMATION REGARDING OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE LI- CENSES

The “IwIP – A Lightweight TCP/IP stack” included in some products is licensed under the “BSD licence”. A copy of that license in the English original version with a copyright notice, a disclaimer of warranty, and an exclusion of liability is included below. Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AU-

THOR ``AS IS`` AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

EVERYTHING FROM A TO Z

INDEX

A

ABS, Antilock Brake System 97

Acceleration Assistant, refer to Launch Control 61

ACC, see camera-based cruise control 101

Activated-charcoal filter 120

Active Cruise Control, see camera-based cruise control 101

Additives, oil 197

Adjustments, seats/head re- straints 36

Adjustments, steering wheel 44

After washing vehicle 221

Airbags 81

Airbags, indicator/warning light 82

Air circulation, refer to Recirculated-air mode 119

Air circulation, see Recircu- lated-air mode 116

Air conditioner 115

Air, dehumidifying, see Cooling function 116, 118

Air distribution, manual 116, 119

Air flow, air conditioner 116

Air flow, automatic climate control 119

Air pressure, tires 178

Air vents, refer to Ventilation 120

Alarm system 30

Alarm triggering 30

Alarm, unintentional 31

All around the center console 16

All around the roofliner 17 All around the steering wheel 14

All-season tires, see Winter tires 187

Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 122

Alternative oil types 197

Antifreeze, washer fluid 57

Antilock Brake System, ABS 97

Anti-slip control, see DSC 97

Apple iPod/iPhone 157

Approved axle load 227

Ash tray 125

Assistance when driving off 100

Assist system, see Intelligent Safety 90

AUTO intensity 118

Automatic car wash 220

Automatic climate control 117

Automatic Curb Monitor 42

Automatic deactivation, Front-seat passenger airbags 83

Automatic headlight control 77

Automatic locking 30

Automatic recirculated-air control 119

Automatic transmission with Steptronic 58

AUTO program, automatic climate control 118

AUTO program, intensity 118

Auto Start/Stop function 51

AUX-IN port 156

Average fuel consumption 71

Average speed 72

Axle loads, weights 227

B

Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 37

Balance 150

Band-aids, see First-aid kit 214

Bar for tow-starting/towing 217

Bass 150

Battery replacement, vehicle battery 212

Battery, vehicle 212

Belts, safety belts 38

Beverage holder, cu- pholder 130

Bluetooth, refer to Hands-free system 164

Bonus range, GREEN mode 144

Bottle holder, see Cupholder 130

Brake assistant 97

Brake discs, break-in 136

Brake pads, break-in 136

Braking, hints 137

Breakdown assistance 214

Break-in 136

Bug light 204

Bulb replacement 203

Bulb replacement, front 204

Bulb replacement, rear 206

Bulb replacement, side 209

Bulbs and lights 203

Button, Start/Stop 49

Bypassing, see Jump-starting 214

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 7

Camera-based cruise control 101

Camera lenses, care 223

Can holder, see Cu-pholder 130

Car battery 212

Car care products 221

Care, displays 223

Care, vehicle 221

Cargo area 126

Cargo area, adapting size 131

Cargo area, enlarging 127

Cargo area lid 27

Cargo area, storage compartments 131

Cargo cover 126

Cargo, securing 140

Cargo straps, securing cargo 140

Car key, see Remote control 22

Carpet, care 223

Car wash 220

Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust system 137

CBS Condition Based Service 200

Center armrest 130

Center console 16

Central instrument cluster, LED ring 73

Central locking system 26

Changes, technical, refer to Own Safety 7

Changing parts 202

Changing the station 152

Changing wheels 210

Changing wheels/tires 186

Chassis number, see vehicle identification number 9

Check Control 63

Checking the oil level electronically 195

Children, seating position 45

Children, transporting safely 45

Child restraint fixing sys- tem 45

Child restraint fixing system LATCH 47

Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 46

Child safety locks 48

Child seat, mounting 46

Child seats 45

Chrome parts, care 222

Chrono package, cockpit 74

Cigarette lighter 125

Cleaning, displays 223

Climate control 115, 117

Clock 67

Closing/opening via door lock 26

Closing/opening with remote control 24

Clothes hooks 131

Coasting 145

Coasting with engine decoupled, coasting 145

Coasting with idling engine 145

Combination switch, see Turn signals 54

Combi switch, see wiper sys- tem 55

Comfort Access 28

Compartments in the doors 130

Compass 123

Compressor 188

Condensation on windows 119

Condensation under the vehicle 138

Condition Based Service CBS 200

Confirmation signal 30

Control systems, driving stability 97

Convenient opening 24

Coolant 198

Cooling function 116, 118

Cooling, maximum 118

Cooling system 198

Cornering lamp 78

Corrosion on brake discs 138

Cosmetic mirror 125

Courtesy lamps during unlocking 24

Courtesy lamps with the vehicle locked 25

Cruise control 106

Cruise control, active 101

Cruising range 67

Cupholder 130

Current fuel consumption 68

D

Damage, tires 186

Damping control, dynamic 99

Data, technical 226

Date 67

Date, radio 73

Date, setting on radio 73

Daytime running lights 78

Defrosting, refer to defrosting the windows 116

Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 119

Defrosting the windows 116

Dehumidifying, air 116, 118

Digital clock 67

Digital compass 123

Digital radio 153

Dimensions 226

Dimmable exterior mirrors 43

Dimmable interior rearview mirror 43

Direction indicator, see Turn signals 54

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 63

Display, engine temperature 72
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 79
Displays 62
Displays, cleaning 223
Disposal, coolant 199
Disposal, vehicle battery 213
Distance control, see PDC 108
Distance, setting units 72
Door lock, see Remote control 22
Drive mode, GREEN mode 143
Drive-off assistant 100
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 97
Driving Dynamics Control 99
Driving instruction, GREEN mode 145
Driving instructions, break-in 136
Driving mode 99
Driving notes, general 136
Driving stability control systems 97
Driving tips 136
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 97
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 98
Dynamic Damping Control 99
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 97
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 98

E

Electronic displays, instrument cluster 63

Electronic oil measurement 195

Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 97

Emergency detection, remote control 23

Emergency release, fuel filler flap 174

Emergency start function, engine start 23

Emergency wheel, compact wheel, refer to Emergency wheel 210

Energy Control 68

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 51

Engine, automatic switch-off 51

Engine compartment 193

Engine compartment, working in 194

Engine coolant 198

Engine idling when driving, coasting 145

Engine oil 195

Engine oil, adding 196

Engine oil additives 197

Engine oil change 197

Engine oil filler neck 196

Engine oil types, alternative 197

Engine oil types, suitable 197

Engine start during malfunction 23

Engine start, jump-starting 214

Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 50

Engine stop 50

Engine temperature, display 72

Entering a car wash 220

Equipment, interior 121

Error displays, see Check Control 63

ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 97

Exchanging wheels/tires 186

Exhaust system 137

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 43

Exterior mirrors 42

External start 214

External temperature display 67

External temperature warning 67

Eyes for securing cargo 140

F

Fader 150

Failure message, see Check Control 63

False alarm, refer to Unintentional alarm 31

Fan, refer to Air flow 116

Fan, see Air flow 119

Filler neck for engine oil 196

Fine wood, care 222

First-aid kit 214

Fitting for towing, see tow fitting 218

Flat tire, changing wheels 210

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88

Flat tire, repairing 188

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

Flat tire, warning lamp 85, 88

Flooding 137

Floor carpet, care 223

Floor mats, care 223

Fogged up windows 116

Folding back rear seat back-rests 127

Fold-out position, windshield wipers 57

Foot brake 137

Formats, setting 72

Front airbags 81

Front-end collision warning with City Braking function 91

Front fog lights 79

Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 83

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator lamp 83

FTM Flat Tire Monitor 88

Fuel 176

Fuel consumption, see Average fuel consumption 71

Fuel filler flap 174

Fuel gauge 67

Fuel lid 174

Fuel quality 176

Fuel recommendation 176

Fuel, tank capacity 230

Fuse 213

G

Garage door opener, see Universal Integrated Remote Control 121

Gasoline 176

Gear change, Steptronic transmission 58

Gear shift indicator 68

General driving notes 136

Glare shield 125

Glass sunroof, refer to Panoramic glass sunroof 33

Glove compartment 129

Gong, volume equalization 150

GREEN mode 143

GREEN mode, bonus range 144

GREEN mode indicator 143

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 99

GREEN tip 145

Gross vehicle weight, approved 227

Ground clearance 138

H

Halogen headlights 204

Handbrake, refer to parking brake 53

Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 122

Hands-free system 164

Hazard warning flashers 214

HD Radio 153

Head airbag 81

Headlight control, automatic 77

Headlight courtesy delay fea- ture 77

Headlight flasher 54

Headlight glass 204

Headlights, care 221

Head restraints 36

Head restraints, front 40

Head restraints, rear 41

Heavy cargo, stowing 140

High-beam Assistant 78

High beams 54

High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assistant 78

Hills 138

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 100

Holder for beverages 130

Homepage 6

Hood 194

Horn 14

Hot exhaust system 137

Hydroplaning 137

|

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 67

Icy roads, see External temperature warning 67

Identification marks, tires 184

Identification number, see vehicle identification number 9

Ignition key, see Remote control 22

Ignition off 49

Ignition on 49

Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 73

Indication of a flat tire 85, 88

Indicator lamp, see Check Control 63

Individual air distribution 116, 119

Individual settings, see Personal Profile 24

Inflation pressure, tires 178

Inflation pressure warning, tires 88

Info display, refer to On-Board computer 71

Information 6

Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88

Instrument cluster 62

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 63

Instrument lighting 79

Integrated key 22

Intelligent Safety 90

Intensity, AUTO program 118

Interior equipment 121

Interior lights 80

Interior lights during unlocking 24

Interior lights with the vehicle locked 25

Interior motion sensor 31

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature 43

Interior rearview mirror, compass 123

Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable 43

Internet site 6

Interval display, service requirements 68

Interval mode 55

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 210

Joystick, Steptronic transmission 58

Jump-starting 214

K

Key/remote control 22

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 28

Key Memory, see Personal Profile 24

Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 58

Knee airbag 82

L

Label on recommended tires 186

Lamp replacement 203

Lamp replacement, front 204

Lamp replacement, rear 206

Lamp replacement, side 209

Language, setting 72

Lashing eyes, securing cargo 140

LATCH child restraint sys- tem 47

Launch Control 61

Leather, care 221

LED bug light 204

LED headlights 204

LED ring, central instrument cluster 73

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 203

License Texts and Certifications 235

Light 76

Light-alloy wheels, care 222

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 203

Lighter 125

Lighting 76

Lights and bulbs 203

Light switch 76

Load 140

Loading 139

Lock, door 26

Locking/unlocking via door lock 26

Locking/unlocking with remote control 24

Locking, automatic 30

Locking, settings 29

Lock, power window 33

Locks, doors, and windows 48

Low beams 76

Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assistant 78

Lower back support, mechanical 37

Luggage rack, refer to Roof-mounted luggage rack 140

Lumbar support, mechanical 37

M

Maintenance 200

Maintenance requirements 200

Maintenance, service requirements 68

Maintenance system, MINI 200

Make-up mirror 125

Malfunction displays, see Check Control 63

Manual air distribution 116, 119

Manual air flow 116, 119

Manual mode, transmission 59

Manual operation, door lock 26

Manual operation, exterior mirrors 42

Manual operation, fuel filler flap 174

Manual operation, Park Distance Control PDC 110

Manual transmission 58

Manufacturer of the MINI 7

Marking, run-flat tires 187

Master key, see Remote control 22

Maximum cooling 118

Maximum speed, display 69

Maximum speed, winter tires 187

Medical kit 214

Menu in instrument cluster 70

Messages, see Check Control 63

Microfilter 117, 120

MID - program, driving dynamics 99

MINI maintenance sys- tem 200

Minimum tread, tires 185

Mirrors 42

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle 137

Mobile phone 164

Mobility System 188

Mode, GREEN Mode 143

Modifications, technical, refer to Own Safety 7

Moisture in headlight 204

Mounting of child restraint systems 46

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 14

N

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 40

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 41

New wheels and tires 186

Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 217

0

OBD Onboard Diagnostics 201

Octane rating, see Recommended fuel grade 176

Odometer 67

Oil 195

Oil, adding 196

Oil additives 197

Oil change 197

Oil change interval, service requirements 68

Oil filler neck 196

Oil types, alternative 197

Oil types, suitable 197

Old batteries, disposal 213

On-board computer 71

On-board computer, refer to On-board computer 71

Onboard Diagnostics OBD 201

Onboard vehicle tool kit 202

Opening/closing via door lock 26

Opening/closing with remote control 24

Optional equipment, standard equipment 6

Outside air, refer to Automatic recirculated-air control 119

Own safety 7

P

Paint, vehicle 221

Panoramic glass sunroof 33

Parallel parking assistant 111

Park Distance Control PDC 108

Parked vehicle, condensation 138

Parking aid, see PDC 108

Parking assistant 111

Parking brake 53

Parking lights 76

Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 42

PDC Park Distance Control 108

Pedestrian warning with city braking function 94

Performance Control 98

Personal Profile 24

Phone 164

Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 34

Pinch protection system, windows 32

Plastic, care 222

PostCrash 96

Power failure 213

Power windows 31

Prescribed engine oil types 197

Pressure, tire air pressure 178

Pressure warning, tires 88

Profile, see Personal Profile 24

Protective function, glass sun-roof 34

Protective function, windows 32

R

Radiator fluid 198

Radio, AM/FM stations 151

Radio, Apple iPod/iPhone 157

Radio, AUX-IN port 156

Radio, control elements 151

Radio, external devices 156

Radio, FM/AM 151

Radio, muting 151

Radio-operated key, see Remote control 22

Radio, overview 151

Radio ready state 49

Radio, satellite radio 154

Radio, save stations 153

Radio, USB audio inter-face 157

Rain sensor 55

Rear fog lights 79

Rear lights 206

Rear luggage rack 141

Rearview mirror 42

Rear window de- froster 117, 119

Recirculated-air filter 120

Recirculated-air mode 116, 119

Recommended fuel grade 176

Recommended tire brands 186

Refueling 174

Remaining range 67

Remote control/key 22

Remote control, blocking 23

Remote control, malfunction 25

Remote control, replacing the battery 22

Remote control, universal 121

Replacement fuse 213

Replacing parts 202

Replacing the battery, remote control 22

Replacing wheels/tires 186

Reporting safety malfunctions 10

RES CNCL button, see camera-based cruise control 101

RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 106

Reserve warning, see Range 67

Resetting the tone set- tings 150

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85

Retaining straps, securing cargo 140

Retreaded tires 187

Roadside parking lights 77

RON recommended fuel grade 176

Roofliner 17

Roof load capacity 227

Roof-mounted luggage rack 140

Rope for tow-starting/towing 217

RSC Run Flat System Component, see Run-flat tires 187

Rubber components, care 222

Run-flat tires 187

S

Safe braking 137

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 39

Safety belts 38

Safety belts, care 222

Safety switch, windows 33

Safety systems, airbags 81

Satellite radio 154

Saving fuel 142

Screwdriver 202

Screw thread for tow fitting 218

Sealant 188

Seat belts, see Safety belts 38

Seat heating, front 38

Seating position for children 45

Seats 36

Select a station 151

Selecting a station manually 152

Selection list in instrument cluster 70

Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 58

Sensors, care 223

Service and warranty 8

Service requirements, Condition Based Service CBS 200

Service requirements, display 68

SET button, see camera-based cruise control 101

SET button, see Cruise control 106

Settings and information 72

Settings, locking/unlocking 29

Settings, mirrors 42

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 60

Side airbag 81

Signaling, horn 14

Signals when unlocking 30

Sitting safely 36

Size 226

Slide/tilt glass roof 33

Snow chains 191

Socket 125

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 201

Sound settings 150

Spare fuse 213

Spare tire, refer to Emergency wheel 210

Speed, average 72

Speed limit detection, on-board computer 72

Speed limiter, display 69

Speed Limit Information 69

Speed warning 72

Sport instruments, cockpit 74

SPORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 99

Sport program, transmission 59

Stability control systems 97

Start/stop, automatic function 51

Start/Stop button 49

Start function during malfunction 23

Starting the engine 50

Station, storing 152

Status of Owner's Manual 7

Steering wheel, adjusting 44

Steptronic Sport transmission, refer to Steptronic transmission 58

Steptronic transmission 58

Stopping the engine 50

Storage compartments 129

Storage, tires 187

Storing the vehicle 223

Suitable engine oil types 197

Summer tires, tread 185

Sun visor 125

Supplementary text messages 66

Switch for Dynamic Driving 99

Switch, see Cockpit 14

Symbols 6

T

Tachometer 67

Tailgate 27

Tailgate via remote control 25

Tail lights 206

Technical changes, refer to Own Safety 7

Technical data 226

Temperature, air conditioner 116

Temperature, automatic climate control 118

Temperature display for external temperature 67

Temperature display, setting units 72

Temperature, engine 72

Tempomat, see camera-based cruise control 101

Terminal, starting aid 215

Text messages, supplementary 66

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 30

Thigh support 37

Tilt alarm sensor 31

Time, radio, setting time on the radio 73

Tire damage 186

Tire identification marks 184

Tire inflation pressure 178

Tire inflation pressure monitor, refer to FTM 88

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

Tires, changing 186

Tire sealant 188

Tires, everything on wheels and tires 178

Tires, run-flat tires 187

Tire tread 185

Tools 202

Total vehicle weight 227

Tow fitting 218

Towing 216

Tow-starting 216

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 84

Traction control 98

TRACTION drive mode, driving dynamics 98

Transmission lock, releasing manually 60

Transmission, manual trans- mission 58

Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 58

Transporting children safely 45

Tread, tires 185

Treble 150

Triple turn signal activation 54

Trip odometer 67

Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 67

Turn signal, front 204

Turn signal, side 209

Turn signals, operation 54

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 206

U

Unintentional alarm 31

Units 72

Units, setting 72

Universal remote control 121

Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 59

Unlocking/locking via door lock 26

Unlocking/locking with remote control 24

Unlocking, settings 29

Updates made after the editorial deadline 7

Upholstery care 222

USB audio interface 157

USB interface 126

V

Vanity mirror 125

Vehicle battery 212

Vehicle battery, replacing 212

Vehicle, break-in 136

Vehicle care 221

Vehicle features and options 6

Vehicle identification number 9

Vehicle jack 210

Vehicle paint 221

Vehicle storage 223

Vehicle wash 220

Ventilation 120

VIN, see vehicle identification number 9

W

Warning and indicator lamps, see Check Control 63

Warning displays, see Check Control 63

Warning messages, see Check Control 63

Warning triangle 214

Warranty 7

Washer fluid 57

Washing, vehicle 220

Water on roads 137

Weights 227

Welcome lamps during un- locking 24

Welcome lights 77

Wheels, changing 186

Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 178

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88

Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

Window defroster, rear 117, 119

Windows, powered 31

Windshield cleaning sys- tem 55

Windshield de- froster 117, 119

Windshield washer fluid 57

Windshield wipers, fold-out position 57

Windshield wipers, see wiper system 55

Winter storage, care 223

Winter tires, suitable tires 187

Winter tires, tread 185

Wiper blades, replacing 202

Wiper fluid 57

Wiper system 55

Wood, care 222

Wrench 202

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

01 40 2 963 307 ue

DRIVE ME.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : MINI

Model : Hardtop (2016)

Category : Car